Home

DL850 ScopeCorder Features Guide - Electro

1. Ea 2 11 Inverted Waveform Display Invert ssssssssssssssseseeneeee eene 2 12 Linear Scaling Linear Scale iced gecedeveedsnecdcneyecbesdendenebccneestberseneedeve 2 13 RMS Measurenrient ntn cii rtr itr ide ERI ER ERE re eed 2 15 Voltage Measurement For the 16 CH Voltage Input Module se 2 16 Temperature Measurement eene enne en erre en nere enne nnns 2 19 Strain Measurement 5 ne idee eiit eee i be 0v cod dere tot ced Ce ed qoe dee balun ts 2 21 About Shunt Calibration Only on the 701271 STRAIN DSUB see 2 24 Acceleration Measurement 2 eret eet tier pede eerta deo ete Ee doe nep oo 2 26 Frequency Measurement 2 cccccececeeececceeeeeeeenaececeeeeaaeeeeeeceaaeaeeseeaeanaeceseesceaaeeeeeeseeneaeeeeeneaea 2 28 FV Setting F V Setup frequency measurement sse e 2 28 Input Setup Input Setup frequency measurement sse 2 33 Logic Measurement aie n pe tee derer de es cu de eed es 2 36 CAN Bus Signal Monitoring Applies to the DL850V ssss emm 2 38 Displaying the Menu for Configuring All Channels ALL CH em 2 43 Horizontal Axis Time Axis Setting TIME DIV sees eene enne enne nnne Eea i renes en nennt 3 1 Triggering Trigger Mode MODE eiit iei crt dieci esee eorr cen rne ne nci a dee Ere Eden atasaini kiai 4
2. CH1 to CH16 Analog Signal Logic Signal Mixed including sub channels Bit 1 to Bit 8 Simple Yes Yes us A gt B N Yes Yes Yes A Delay B Yes Yes Yes Edge On A Yes Yes Yes OR Yes Yes Yes AND Yes Yes Yes Period Yes Yes Yes Pulse Width Yes Yes Yes About the Wave Window Trigger gt See here Basic Trigger Settings Trigger source The trigger source signal Trigger slope Specifies which edge rising or falling the DL850 DL850V will trigger on Trigger level The trigger determination level Trigger hysteresis The trigger level margin the DL850 DL850V does not trigger on changes in the signal level within this margin Trigger hold off The amount of time to wait before the next trigger detection applies to all triggers except for the simple trigger when the trigger source is Time the period trigger and the manual trigger Trigger position The position where the trigger point will be displayed applies to all trigger types Trigger delay The delay from the trigger point applies to all trigger types 4 2 IM DL850 01EN 4 Triggering Simple Trigger Simple The DL850 DL850V triggers on trigger source edges rising or falling edges Edge refers to a point where the trigger source passes through the trigger level Trigger level Trigger source The DL850 triggers here at this edge when the trigger edge is set to rising 4 Trigger Source Source The trigger source is the signal tha
3. 7 2 Zooming in on Waveforms Zoom Window Display Display ssesssssssssssseseseneeneeenn enne nennen ener nnn rnane 8 1 Zoom Source Window ZOOM2 Source sssssssesesseeeenen eene ener enne 8 1 Zoom Factor MAG knob eerie eerie irent eire reed eese a dine dpi pe cd quiere 8 2 Position Zoom POSITION knob Zoom1 Position Zoom2 Position 8 2 Display Ratio of the Main Window Main Ratio seee emen 8 2 Window Layout Window Layout essseee enemies 8 2 IM DL850 01EN Contents 10 11 12 Display Format Format Zoom1 and Format Zoomo2 sssseee emen 8 3 Moving the Zoom Position to the Latest Position Move Zoom 1 to Front and Move Zooms2 to Front treni teatri etie Pepe ste tte ede ten dS e qp dec Bre a fepe 8 3 Auto Scroll A to Scroll 2 2 5n ze ie eet re o e ERE 8 3 Waveforms That Are Zoomed Allocation emen 8 3 Cursor Measurement Window Selection Select Window nem ene eem e emnes 9 1 TY Waveforms zm oett Pe radere eee e iem e ein 9 1 Horizontal Cursors Horizontal T Y waveforms sssseseeeeeee emen 9 1 Vertical Cursors Vertical T Y waveforms sssssssseeeeee enne eene 9 2 Horizontal and Vertical Cursors H amp V T Y waveforms seen 9 4 Marker Cursors Marker T Y waveforms sese eene emen nennen 9 4 Angle Cursors Degree T Y
4. f you change the waveform acquisition conditions and start waveform acquisition the past data stored in the acquisition memory is cleared You can use the snapshot feature to retain the displayed waveform on the screen This feature allows you to update the display without having to stop waveform acquisition Regardless of the trigger settings you can make the DL850 DL850V trigger by pressing the MANUAL TRIG key on the front panel 5 10 IM DL850 01EN 6 Display Window Types DISPLAY The DL850 DL850V has the following types of windows T Y Time axis Waveform Display Window Main window Displays normal waveforms which are not magnified Zoom window Zoom1 and Zoom2 Displays zoomed waveforms according to the settings specified using the ZOOM key X Y Window Window 1 and Window 2 Displays X Y waveforms according to the settings specified using the X Y key FFT Window FFT1 window and FFT 2 window Displays FFT waveforms according to the settings specified using the FFT key Dual Capture Window Appears when the dual capture feature is used Extra Window This window displays cursor measurement values automated measurement values of waveform parameters and so on It can be used when values overlap with waveforms and are difficult to see Switching the Menu Area Display You can switch between the full screen waveform display the channel information display and the waveform numeric monitor display Display Patter
5. DC The input signal is coupled directly to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit Set the input coupling to DC when you want to measure the entire signal including both the DC and AC components AC Only when measuring AC voltage The input signal is coupled to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit through a capacitor Set the input coupling to AC when you want to measure only the amplitude of the AC signal without the DC component GND The input signal is coupled to the ground rather than to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit Set the input coupling to GND to check the ground level on the screen DC AC GND Input terminal vo rical Input terminal Vertical Input terminal Vertical oI control m control 1MQ 1MO circuit circuit TC Only when measuring temperature Set the coupling to TC when you are measuring temperature using the 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF or 701265 TEMP HPV DC RMS With the 701260 HV with RMS the DC and AC components of the input signal are converted to RMS values and displayed An RMS conversion circuit is connected to the same vertical control circuit coupling arrangement that is used when the coupling is set to DC AC RMS With the 701260 HV with RMS the AC components of the input signal are converted to RMS values and displayed without the DC component An RMS conversion circuit is connected to the same vertical con
6. Destination Type Print To You can save screen captures and print them on the following types of printers Built in printer Builtln You can select this option when the optional built in printer is installed Network printer Network You can select a network printer that the DL850 DL850V is connected to You must configure the network printer in advance File File You can save screen captures to files in PNG BMP and JPEG formats Printing from the Built In Printer Builtln option Models that have the optional built in printer installed can print from it Images printed from the built in printer are printed just as they are displayed on the DL850 DL850V Comment Comment You can enter a comment of up to 26 characters in length The comment that you create is displayed in the bottom of the screen Changing this comment also changes the network printer and file comments Printing from a Network Printer Network You can select a network printer that the DL850 DL850V is connected to You must configure the network printer in advance P See here Images printed from the network printer are printed just as they are displayed on the DL850 DL850V Printer Type Format The printers that the DL850 DL850V can use are listed below HP Inkjet HP inkjet printers HP Laser HP laser printers EPSON Inkjet EPSON inkjet printers Color Color You can select the color format to print in from the options below
7. Saving Sub Channel Data Sub Channel When you save data in ASCII format you can choose whether to supplement the data of 16 CH Voltage Input Module sub channels Supplement Supplement Blank spaces are filled with repetitions of the same data so that the sub channels have the same amount of data as an ordinary channel Space Space Spaces are left where there is no data Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here Li f you change the extension of the saved data file by using a PC or some other device the DL850 DL850V will no longer be able to load it Upto 1000 files and folders can be displayed in the file list If there are more than a total of 1000 files and folders in a given folder the file list for that folder will only display 1000 files and folders There is no way to set which files and folders are displayed Math waveforms are not saved if they are shorter than 10 div or if the computation start point is not 5 div Data Format for Saving Multiple Records The DL850 DL850V saves data that contains multiple records such as history waveforms in the following data format ASCII format CR LF is inserted between records Header CH1 data 1 1 CH2 data 1 1 CR LF 7 CH1 data 1 2 CH2 is 1 2 CR LF One l loryrecond CH1 data 1 m CH2 data 1 m CR LF _ CR LF CH1 data 2 1 CH2data2 1 CR LF CH1 data 2 2 CH2 data 2 2 CR LF CH1 data 2 n CH2data2
8. 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP client 80 World Wide Web HTT Web server and WebDAV server 515 LPR client 1001 Instrument control through the Ethernet g interface UDP Port Numbers Port Number Description Used For 67 Bootstrap Protocol Server DHCP client 68 Bootstrap Protocol Client listen port 123 Network Time Protocol SNTP client The port number when FTP passive mode is disabled When FTP passive mode is enabled you can set any port number When FTP passive mode is disabled connections are established from the server If you are connecting the DL850 DL850V from behind a firewall enable FTP passive mode App 26 IM DL850 01EN Index Symbols Page 1 cycle modes ib ania Shin Lese 10 6 16 CH module notes about using sessssss 1 8 16 CH module sampling timing eeesseeesses 1 8 A Page A x B N trigger AE 4 8 ACCEL coupling setting 2 7 acceleration measurement 2 26 AC coupling setting eseeseseseeeeeeennee 2 6 accumulation 421a ciere eee rae o onec ee eaa Tto re fenus aei read acquisition mode ACTON e TOP MP A Delay B trigger all channels configuring 2 43 all sub channels setting c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneees 2 18 AND trigger iA angle CUrSO S o uten E He TRU Eee a Ta 9 6 area calculation Of 2 2 ace etes App 1 automated measurement of waveform parame
9. Contents 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Display Ratio of the Main Window Main Ratio seeeem em 12 3 Window Layout Window Layout eeeseeen en enne n ener nn nere enne nnns 12 3 Horizontal Scale Horiz Axis citi nep cete poene reati eee ce be cee d deeds 12 3 FFT Analysis on Models with User Defined Computation Option 12 3 Notes about FFT Computation ssssssssssssssssssesee eene eren nennt nen n nn enne neneman 12 5 GO NO GO Determination Mode MOde EE 13 1 Waveform Zone Wave Zone enceinte nitent erret aD aka iiiad 13 1 Waveform Parameters Parameter ssessseseeeeeenee emen enne nennen nnns 13 4 Notes about GO NO GO Determination eessseseeeeeneen nennen nennen 13 5 Action On Trigger Mode MOd 5 eee I ih pite ee eet teed ees aito dhe idan 14 1 Action Action Setup e etre edere toe Aer tel b e e eee deer 14 1 Notes about Action on Trigger sssssssseeeeeene nennen nnne nnne en nennt 14 2 Searching Waveforms Search Type Type tet seein e on ees tb td eee ite e Laien eee eae ended 15 1 Edge Searchi Edge s inet hee tes ede nns sus 15 2 Event Search Event etui eerte tates utet out uU RUP Eoi beh ack E a Eae 15 4 Logic Pattern Search Logic Pattern ccccccececceceeeeeee cece eeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeea 15 4 Time Searchi Titrigys
10. Li You cannot select channels in which strain modules are not installed 2 44 IM DL850 01EN 3 Horizontal Axis Time Axis Setting TIME DIV When the internal clock is being used the time axis scale is set as a length of time per grid division 1 div The time axis scale can be set within the following ranges 100 ns div to 30 s div 1 min div to 30 min div 1 hour div to 12 hour div and 1 day div to 3 day div The transition from seconds to minutes to hours to days occurs automatically Because the horizontal display range is 10 div the amount of time on the waveform that is displayed is equal to the time axis setting x 10 When the 720210 HS100M12 module is installed the scale range starts at 100 ns div when it is not installed the scale range starts at 1 us div 1 div 500 us 1 div 2 1 ms lt gt lt m 10 div 5 ms I 10 div 10 ms Internal and External Clocks Time base selection Under the initial settings the DL850 DL850V samples the waveform data using the clock signal produced by its internal time base circuit internal clock You can also use an external clock signal to control sampling Apply the external clock signal to the external clock input terminal on the left panel of the DL850 DL850V This external clock input is useful for synchronizing to the
11. N oe Extra Window Extra Window When waveforms and measured values overlap and are difficult to see you can use the extra window to display them separately The extra window appears below the T Y waveform display window The following values appear in the extra window Cursor measurement values Automated measurement values of waveform parameters The digital values of each channel only during roll mode display Height of the Extra Window Set the height of the extra window OFF The extra window is not displayed 1 to 8 The extra window is set to the selected height Auto The extra window appears automatically when you perform cursor measurements and automated measurements of waveform parameters Li The number of displayed points on the T Y waveform display window varies depending on the height of the extra window Even if the number of displayed points changes the vertical resolution does not change When the extra window is displayed depending on the Zoom Format the scale values may overlap and be difficult to read Grid Graticule You can set the window grid to one of the following options Displays the grid using broken lines HH Displays the grid using crosshairs Displays a frame IM DL850 01EN 6 Display Turning the Scale Value Display On and Off Scale Value You can display the upper and lower limits scale values of each waveform s vertic
12. The selected markers appear on the measurement source waveforms Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform for each marker to one of the waveforms below OFF Disables measurement FFT1 The waveform in the FFT1 window is measured FFT2 The waveform in the FFT2 window is measured You can make measurements in the FFT2 window on models equipped with the G2 option IM DL850 01EN 9 9 9 Cursor Measurement Position Position Set the position of the selected marker You can move the markers within the range of 5 to 5 div of the frequency axis in 0 01 div steps Marker Shape Marker Form Set the shape of the displayed marker to one of the options below Mark A dot Line A crosshair Measurement Items Item Setup Marker cursors move on the waveform data You can measure the following values at the markers x1 x2 x3 X4 A X2 X1 A X3 X1 A X4 X1 A X3 X2 A X4 X2 A X4 X3 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 A Y2 Y1 A Y3 Y1 A Y4 Y1 A Y3 Y2 A Y4 Y2 A Y4 Y3 Frequency at Marker1 Frequency at Marker2 Frequency at Marker3 Frequency at Marker4 Frequency difference between Marker1 and Marker2 Frequency difference between Marker1 and Marker3 Frequency difference between Marker1 and Marker4 Frequency difference between Marker2 and Marker3 Frequency difference between Marker2 and Marker4 Frequency difference between Marker3 and Marker4 Level at Marker1 Level at Marker
13. 100 ms or 500 ms Configuring the Display Display Setup Menu Font Size Menu Font Size You can set the font size of the menu to Small or Large Menu Background Color Base Color You can set the background color of the menu to Blue or Gray Scale Value Display Font Size Scale Font Size You can set the font size of the scale value display to small or large Items Whose Scale Values Are Displayed Scale On Item Set the items that you want to display when Scale Value is set to ON ALL The vertical axis V Scale and horizontal axis Time Scale are displayed Time Scale Only the horizontal axis Time Scale is displayed 20 8 IM DL850 01EN 20 Other Features Turning the Level Indicator Display On and Off Level Indicator You can choose whether to display the level indicator ON which shows the waveform levels or not OFF The level indicator appears on the right side of the waveform display window Intensity Intensity You can set the intensities of the grid Grid cursor Cursor and marker Marker to values within the range of 1 to 8 Key and Knob Setup Key Knob Setup Turning On or Off the Click Sound Click Sound You can turn on or off the click sound that is generated when you operate the jog shuttle START STOP Key Response Time START STOP Response Time You can set the response time of the START STOP key to instant Quick or 1 s or more gt 1sec Key Lock Key Protect You can lock t
14. Anerror message will appear if shunt calibration fails because of out of range values or some other reason When this happens change the range and perform shunt calibration again Donot connect and disconnect multiple USB devices repetitively Provide a 10 second interval between removal and connection Reducing Noise Because measurements are made at the mV level the strain gauge is extremely susceptible to noise If the execution of balancing or shunt calibration fails it may be due to noise Please take the following points into consideration Because the strain gauge is attached away from the bridgehead we recommend that you use twisted wire for extensions Use a bridgehead with high noise resistance We recommended that you use a YOKOGAWA bridgehead 701957 or 701958 they are highly resistant to noise IM DL850 01EN App 15 Appendix Calculation of the Shunt Resistance To execute shunt calibration you need to calculate the shunt resistance Rs and the expected strain in advance For P2 Y use as given in the equation below normally a negative value In the general method given for shunt calibration the easy method an error of 1 to 2 is introduced as the strain value increases Therefore use the detailed method whenever possible Equation for Rs and When Shunt Calibration Is Executed General Equation Easy method ARIR K x g 1 Fundamental strain equation AR R
15. Bandwidth Yes Threshold Yes Hys Yes Slope Yes Chattering Suppression Yes Pull Up No When you select a preset the setup items are automatically set to the values in the table The meaning of Yes and No in the table is as follows Yes The setting can be configured No The setting cannot be configured it does not appear on the menu 1 2 NOOO Oo Set the probe type to 1 1 or 10 1 Set the bandwidth limit to 100 Hz 1 kKHz 10 kHz 100 kHz or Full You cannot select full for AC100V or AC200V Set the hysteresis to 1 2 5 or 5 Set the slope to rising or falling Set the chattering elimination value to a value from 0 ms to 1000 ms Enable or disable the pull up This setting is only available for Pull up 5V Voltage ranges When probe 1 1 select 1 V 2 V 5 V 10 V 20 V or 50 V When probe 10 1 select 10 V 20 V 50 V 100 V 200 V or 500 V 8 Set the coupling to DC or AC Set the threshold level to a value within the specified voltage range IM DL850 01EN App 25 Appendix Appendix 7 TCP and UDP Port Numbers The TCP and UDP port numbers that are used on the Ethernet interface of the DL850 DL850V are listed below TCP Port Numbers Port Number Description Used For 20 File Transfer Default Data FTP server FTP client and a portion of the Web server 21 File Transfer Control FTP server FTP client and a portion of the Web server
16. DUTYH C1 Up Lo DUTYL DUTYL C1 Up Lo Displays the computation of the pulse widths between a rising edge and the next rising edge Displays the computation of the pulses width between a rising edge and the next falling edge Displays the computation of the pulse widths between a falling edge and the next rising edge Displays the computation of the pulse widths between a falling edge and the next falling edge Displays the computation of the pulse widths from a rising or falling edge to the next rising or falling edge Positive high duty cycle within each cycle of the specified waveform Negative low duty cycle within each cycle of the specified waveform FILT1 FILT1 C1 FILT2 FILT2 C1 HLBT HLBT C1 MEAN MEAN C1 LS LS MAG C1 LS LOGMAG C1 LS PHASE C1 LS REAL C1 Displays the result of applying a filter to the specified waveform Displays the result of applying a filter to the specified waveform Displays the Hilbert transform of the specified waveform Displays the 10th order moving average of the specified waveform Displays the amplitude of the specified waveform s linear spectrum Displays the logarithmic amplitude of the specified waveform s linear spectrum Displays the phase of the specified waveform s linear spectrum Displays the real part of the specified waveform s linear spectrum LS IMAG C1 Displays the imaginary part of the specified waveform s linear spectrum PS PS MAG C1
17. Dot Connect sssssseeeeenneene enm eene nennen nennen 6 4 Setting the Number of Data Points to Use for Waveform Display Decimation 6 5 Acc mulation Acc mrulate 2 22 o zc ned eie i ite te iei teri d breite e oe ERE Rebel ed te etr oo ee icd 6 5 Manual Event Manual Event ccccecccececeeeceneeeeeeeeee ee eeee eee caaeaeeeeseaaeaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeseneneaeeeeeeteea 6 6 Switching the Menu Area Display 2 c cccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeseceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaea 6 6 Displaying X Y Waveforms Turning the X Y Window Display On and Off Display sem 7 1 Eight Pairs of X Y Waveforms Setup ssssssssssssssesesseeeeer enne nnne nenne nnne 7 1 Start Point and End Point Start Point and End Point ssse e 7 1 Pen Marker Per Marker iecore terni rettet Dele rentur e ner Line ee enine ne db oen 7 1 Clearing Waveforms at Acquisition Start Trace clear on Start 7 2 Display Ratio of the Main Window Main Ratio ssseee mee 7 2 Window Layout Window Layout sesseeeenen em nem nemen nennen ennemis 7 2 Combine Display Combine Display eseeseeeenenem emm emere nnne 7 2 Interpolation Method Dot Connect sssssseeeeeeene enn enne nnen nene 7 2 Setting the Number of Data Points to Use for Waveform Display Decimation
18. IM DL850 01EN 20 Other Features Remote Control Remote Ctrl Communication interface for controlling the DL850 DL850V from a PC For details see the communication interface user s manual IM DL850 17EN Types of Communication Interfaces Device USB GP IB and Network are the available communication interfaces Li Only use the selected communication interface If you send commands simultaneously from another communication interface that has not been selected the DL850 DL850V will not execute the commands properly When the DL850 DL850V is in remote mode and is communicating with a PC REMOTE appears in the center of the DL850 DL850V screen All keys except SHIFT CLEAR TRACE are disabled in Remote mode USB Connects the DL850 DL850V to a PC using USB To remotely control the DL850 DL850V using communication commands through the USB port select USBTMC and then carry out the following procedure Install YOKOGAWA USB TMC Test and Measurement Class driver on your PC For information about how to obtain the YOKOGAWA USB TMC driver contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer You can also access the YOKOGAWA USB driver download webpage and download the driver http tmi yokogawa com service support downloads Do not use USB TMC drivers or software supplied by other companies GP IB Connects the DL850 DL850V to a PC using GP IB Address Address You can set the address to a value from 0 to 30 Each device t
19. Linear scaling Linear Scale A and B for AX B or P1 X P1 Y P2 X and P2 Y for P1 P2 unit string Unit display mode Disp Type number of decimal places Decim Num unit prefix Sub Unit P See here O The 701271 STRAIN_DSUB strain module supports shunt calibration Copy Copy to You can copy the various vertical axis and linear scaling settings from one channel to other channels whose modules are of the same type as the source channel Source Channel Source Channel Set the source channel to a channel from CH1 to CH16 or to 16chVOLT Ifthe 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel Destination Channels Destination Channel You can set the destination channels by selecting ALL ON ALL OFF and CH1 to CH16 Execute Execute Select Execute to copy the settings IM DL850 01EN 2 43 2 Vertical Axis o When the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed you can also copy the settings of the sub channels You can only specify channels as copy destinations The waveform display color and label settings are not copied Strain Balance Strain Balance You can perform strain balancing on multiple installed strain modules CH1 to CH16 Select the modules that you want to perform strain balancing on Balance Balance Execute Execute Select to perform strain balancing For information about strain balancing see the section on strain measurement P See here
20. Measurement Resolution The measurement resolution varies depending on the module For example the 701250 HS10M12 701255 NONISO_10M12 and 720210 HS100M12 use 12 bit A D converters and sample the input signal at a resolution of 150 levels per div The 701251 HS1M16 701260 HV with RMS 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701265 TEMP HPV 701275 ACCL VOLT and 720220 16CH VOLT use 16 bit A D converters and sample the input signal at a resolution of 2400 levels per div 2 4 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Waveform Vertical Position Vertical POSITION knob The DL850 DL850V can display the waveforms of the main analog input channels the waveforms of the sub analog input channels and computed waveforms Because the DL850 DL850V can display so many waveforms the waveforms may overlap and be difficult to view If this happens you can adjust the vertical display position to make waveforms easier to view vertical position The vertical position can be moved within the range of 5 div When you change the vertical scale V div the location of the vertical position mark does not change Use the POSITION knob to set the vertical position for each channel and sub channel The same POSITION knob is used to adjust the position of each channel and sub channel To change the position of a channel press the key from CH1 to CH16 that corresponds to the channel To change the position of a sub channel press an odd
21. Save Data and Save Image Actions Do not set the storage medium s root folder as the save destination The DL850 DL850V can only store 512 files to the root folder of a storage medium that it has formatted The maximum number of files that can be created in a single folder is 1000 Make sure that there are no files in the destination folder before you start the action on trigger feature If you select waveform data saving Save Data and screen capture saving Save Image at the same time use the FILE menu to specify separate folders to save to In the FILE menu if you set Auto Naming to Numbering as the number of saved files increases the amount of time required to save a file will also increase Li Select whether to enable the action on trigger feature when the power is turned on P See here 14 2 IM DL850 01EN 15 Searching Waveforms You can search the displayed waveforms for locations that match the specified conditions You can zoom in on the detected locations You can search the waveforms within the specified search range over up to 2 Gpoint However you cannot search through waveforms that have been stored through hard disk recording Point of detection Search start point Search end point Hysteresis E f M1 Specified level ava Detected section is displayed expanded in the zoom window N J Search condition Two rising edges Search Type Type Set the search type to one of th
22. This setting is the same as the measurement time period setting for the automated measurement of waveform parameters P See here Execution of Measurement Execute Measure This item is the same as the Execute Measure item for cyclic statistical processing P See here Li n the statistical processing of history waveforms the number of history waveforms that processing is performed on is indicated in the Count column of the statistical value display The number of history waveforms that can be used in the statistical processing of history waveforms varies depending on the number of measured items that the DL850 DL850V is calculating the statistics of 64000 the number of measured items that the DL850 DL850V is calculating the statistics of 10 10 IM DL850 01EN 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Result Display Display Result This item is the same as the Display Result item for cyclic statistical processing gt See here o In the statistical processing of history waveforms you can select a waveform with the jog shuttle and press the SET key to zoom in on it Notes about Statistical Processing During statistical processing pe appears in the center of the screen All soft keys except for Abort are invalid Statistical processing cannot be performed On waveforms that have been recorded to a hard disk OnFFT waveforms When the measurement time period is greater than 100 Mpoint The star
23. User s Manual communication interface features and instructions on how to use them Notes The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from the actual screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the documents concerning it have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of the University of California Trademarks Microsoft Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated GIGAZoom ENGINE is a registered trademark of YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation In this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark or registered trademark names Other company and product names are trademarks or registere
24. and at a high sampling rate captured waveform Dual capturing is useful during low speed sampling when you are observing waveforms over a long period of time and want to capture fast phenomena at a high sample rate When the waveform data is saved captured waveforms are saved along with the main waveforms When you load the main waveforms the captured waveforms are also loaded When the window for displaying captured waveforms the dual capture window is displayed cursor measurement automated measurement of waveform parameters and statistical processing can be performed on the captured waveforms Measured captured waveform values are displayed in italics When captured waveforms are not displayed the measurement and processing are performed on the main waveforms When the waveforms that are measured and processed change the measured values are reset Main waveforms Captured waveforms low speed sampling high speed sampling Roll mode display up to 1 Gpoint Update mode display Sample rate Sample rate 100 kS s or less Faster than that of the main waveform CHT 2 5007 ET vent Events The points where triggering occurred during dual capturing are displayed as events Lm rms cit Z500 eer Vidi Event r D AARAA Zoomed waveform Captured along the time axis waveforms Lu 5e ca Lour 2 500 zia Because there is not Because the data is en
25. and data format settings under Waveform SAVE in the FILE menu Screen Capture Saving Save Image The DL850 DL850V saves the screen capture data to the specified destination SD card internal or external HD option USB storage device or network drive File Path File Path Auto Naming Auto Naming File Name File Name P See here O Changing the auto naming and file name settings for saving image data will change the auto naming and file name settings under Others SAVE in the FILE menu IM DL850 01EN 14 1 14 Action On Trigger E mail Sending Send Mail The DL850 DL850V sends an e mail to the specified address Set the e mail address by pressing UTILITY and then selecting Network gt Mail P See here E mail Send Count Mail Count Set the upper e mail transmission limit When the number of transmitted e mails reaches Mail Count the DL850 DL850V stops sending e mails Notes about Action on Trigger You cannot change settings while the action on trigger feature is active The action on trigger actions may be slow if there is network access while the following operations are being performed Printing and saving of screen capture data and saving of waveform data When the dual capture feature is enabled the only action on trigger action that can be used is e mail sending When hard disk recording to an external or internal hard disk is enabled the action on trigger feature cannot be used Notes about the
26. computation FFT waveform searches and the loading and saving of waveform data GO NO GO determination and the display and searching of history waveforms are not performed on sub channels When you execute auto setup on the 16 CH Voltage Input Module sub channel on off settings and settings that relate to the horizontal axis TIME DIV are not changed Wire all the L input terminals for all the sub channels on the same module to the same potential The L input terminals of the sub channels are common Because the L input terminals are electrically connected inside the DL850 DL850V connecting different potentials to them could result in short circuiting and damage to the 16 CH Voltage Input Module For information about the terminal arrangement see section 3 13 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 O3EN For information about attaching and removing the terminal block and connecting and removing wires from the terminal block see section 3 13 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN IM DL850 01EN 1 9 2 Vertical Axis This section explains how to configure the signal input settings and the amplitude direction display settings The items that can be set vary depending on the installed modules Input Settings CH1 to CH16 The channel menu that corresponds to the key you pressed appears You can set the various vertical axis settings for each channel ALL CH You can configure the settings of all channels while viewing t
27. length also change On the standard model of the DL850 DL850V you can set the record length to a value between 1 kpoint and 250 Mpoint Depending on the model you can set the record length to a value of up to 2 Gpoint 1 4 IM DL850 01EN 1 Main Features Acquisition Mode Specify how the DL850 DL850V processes the sampled data stores it in the acquisition memory and uses it to display waveforms There are four acquisition modes Normal Envelope Averaging and BoxAverage Hard Disk Recording When measurement starts you can record data to an external hard disk that supports eSATA external Serial ATA HDO option or to an internal hard disk HD1 option The recorded data is saved to files automatically You can load the saved data using the DL850 DL850V and convert it to a format that you can analyze on a PC ASCII or floating point Models with the HDO option are equipped with eSATA connectors You need to purchase a hard disk that supports eSATA separately History When waveforms are being measured the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory as a result of a trigger occurrence is displayed as a waveform on the DL850 DL850V screen and can be viewed When waveform acquisition is being triggered in succession and an abnormal waveform appears it is impossible to stop acquisition before a new waveform appears on the screen Normally it would be impossible to view the abnormal waveform However with the history f
28. ssssssssssssssssssessseeeee eren enne enne nnn nnn 11 1 Scaling Mode Scaling Mode eene ene enm nennen enne 11 4 Upper and Lower Limits Upper Lower ssseseneeeeeenenmeennen mener 11 4 Start Point and End Point Start Point and End Point sssseeene 11 4 User Defined Computation Optional 11 4 Expression Expression user defined ssesssseeeeeeeeeeeem mene 11 4 Averaging Settings Average Setup user defined ssssssssssssssseeese 11 7 FFT Settings FFT Setup user defined ssssssseeeeeeeneneem menn 11 9 Filter Settings Filter Setup user defined eee ee eeee cent erent ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeenneeene 11 9 Constant Settings Constant Setup user defined sss 11 10 Notes about Computation niwi d deni ted oet eee eun ed eade uc ei duse enixe 11 10 FFT Turning the FFT On and Off Display emen emen 12 1 Analysis Source Waveform Source ener nre n nennen nnne 12 1 Start Point and Number of FFT Points Start Point and FFT Points 12 1 Window Function Window ccccccccecceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaece eee ccaeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeseeceeeeeesenseaaees 12 2 Vertical Scale Vert Scale Mode sissien enire eeoa edes Rene aen aE ne dide rU 12 2 Cente r Scale Center Sensitive 2 necis oec ete oe aa dedain dadada aats 12 2 IM DL850 01EN
29. zoomed in on ON Displays the zoom windows OFF Does not display the zoom windows Zoom Source Window Zoom2 Source Select the waveforms that you want to enlarge in the Zoom2 window Main Main Main window waveforms e Zoom1 Zoom1 window waveforms IM DL850 01EN 8 1 8 Zooming in on Waveforms Zoom Factor MAG knob Use the Mag knob to set the zoom factor You can set separate horizontal zoom factors for Zoom1 and Zoom2 The zoom window time axis setting changes automatically based on the specified zoom factor Selectable Range Two times the time axis setting TIME DIV of the Main window to the point where the number of data points in the zoom window reaches 10 points per div Li When an external clock signal is being used as the time base you can select one of the following magnifications You can select any magnification up to the point where the number of data points in the zoom window reaches 10 points per div Up to 1000000 in 1 2 5 5 steps x2 x2 5 x5 x10 x25 x50 x100 x250 x500 x1000 x2500 and so on The upper limit of the zoom factor during hard disk recording is the maximum zoom factor that can be displayed during hard disk recording Position Zoom POSITION knob Zoom1 Position Zoom2 Position You can set the zoom position position using the zoom POSITION knob or the jog shuttle Taking the horizontal center of the main window to be 0 div set the center position of the zoom boxes in th
30. 100 The areas force 1 and force 2 can be set in the range of 1 to 100 1 resolution of the input output signal When an area is set to 100 the window functions like a rectangular window On the DL850 DL850V the outer area is the average of the results of the window function for the data outside the area Force1 This setting applies to the input signals of one waveform and two waveform FFTs Force2 This setting applies to the output response signal second parameter of a two waveform FFT Exponential window Force window 100 Weight Weight Setting Time Setting Time 1 frame 100 e e App 10 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Combined Form of the Exponential and Force Windows The DL850 DL850V uses a window function that combines the exponential window and force window to perform computations The outer area of the force window is the average of the results of the window function for the data outside the area When the Force Window Area Is Set to 80 and the Data Outside the Area Is Taken into Account 1 e Damping rate 1 0 9 s Damping rate 20 0 8 e Damping rate 50 3 Damping rate 90 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 1 1 0 20 40 60 80 i 100 Record length Weight The damping rate does not change for the the outer area 80 to 100 of the record length Application Example on t
31. 19 Ethernet Communication Optional Network Printer Net Print You can print screen captures on a network printer The DL850 DL850V can print to the following printers EPSON Inkjet printers EPSON Inkjet HP inkjet printers HP Inkjet HP laser printers HP Laser LPR servers LPR Server Specify the IP address of the printer server that the DL850 DL850V will connect to In a network with a DNS server you can specify the host name and domain name instead of the IP address O LPR is a protocol used to print over a TCP IP network LPR Name LPR Name The name of the shared printer that the DL850 DL850V will connect to Timeout Timeout If the DL850 DL850V cannot print for a certain amount of time it disconnects from the network printer Network Drive Net Drive You can save waveform data and setup data to a network drive through an Ethernet connection FTP Server FTP Server Specify the IP address of the FTP server on the network that you want to save waveform or setup data to In a network with a DNS server you can specify the host name and domain name instead of the IP address Login Name Login Name Specify the login name The characters that you can use for the password are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard Password Password Specify the password that corresponds to the login name The characters that you can use for the password are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard Passive Mode Passive
32. 65 33 17 13 IIR LowPass 4 4 4 3 2 HighPass 4 4 4 4 3 Filter Characteristics Filter Pass band Attenuation Slope Attenuation at Phase Ripple the Stop band Gauss 0 dB Linear phase Sharp 0 3 dB 40 dB at 1 oct Lowpass 40 dB Linear phase 40dBat 10ct Highpass Linear phase IIR 0 dB 5 dB at 1 6 oct Lowpass e Non linear 20 dB at 1 oct Highpass phase For Gaussian filter 3 0 x f fc dB f frequency fc cutoff frequency Frequency Characteristics of Filters f Sampling frequency Hz Gauss 10 cutoff Sharp Low pass 10 cutoff dh T T T T am T T T T 0 0 LU 20 20 4 40 60 60L 4 4 i 1 of O 1f O2f 0 3f O 4f ost of D 1f D 2f D 3f 0 4f ost IIR Low pass 10 cutoff dh T T T T 4 40L 4 60L 4 80 1 1 L Li The higher the filter order the longer it takes for computation IM DL850 01EN App 3 Appendix Hilbert Function HLBT Normally when we analyze real time signals it is useful to think of these signals as the real part of functions of complex variables and to carry out the actual signal analysis using such functions If the real time signal is considered to be the real part of the function the imaginary part can be determined with the Hilbert transform of the real part The Hilbert transform does not change the order of the individual variables The Hilbert transform of a time signal results in another
33. Displays the amplitude of the specified waveform s power spectrum PS LOGMAG C1 Displays the logarithmic amplitude of the specified waveform s power spectrum PSD PSD MAG C1 Displays the amplitude of the specified waveform s power spectrum density PSD LOGMAG C1 CS CS MAG C1 C2 CS LOGMAG C1 C2 CS PHASE C1 C2 CS REAL C1 C2 CS IMAG C1 C2 Displays the logarithmic amplitude of the specified waveform s power spectrum density Displays the amplitude of the cross spectrum of the two specified waveforms Displays the logarithmic amplitude of the cross spectrum of the two specified waveforms Displays the phase of the cross spectrum of the two specified waveforms Displays the real part of the cross spectrum of the two specified waveforms Displays the imaginary part of the cross spectrum of the two specified waveforms TF TF MAG C1 C2 TF LOGMAG C1 C2 TF PHASE C1 C2 TF REAL C1 C2 TF IMAG C1 C2 Displays the amplitude of the transfer function of the two specified waveforms Displays the logarithmic amplitude of the transfer function of the two specified waveforms Displays the phase of the transfer function of the two specified waveforms Displays the real part of the transfer function of the two specified waveforms Displays the imaginary part of the transfer function of the two specified waveforms CH CH MAG C1 C2 Displays the amplitude of the coherence function of the two specified waveforms 1 Set the
34. Number of Data Points to Use for Waveform Display Decimation When the T Y waveform display is not in the interpolation zone and the interpolation method is not set to OFF P P compressed values are displayed When the T Y waveform display is not in the interpolation zone and the interpolation method is set to OFF or when the X Y waveform display is shown the DL850 DL850V displays the acquired data without P P compression by removing the data between fixed intervals You can set the number of points to use to display waveforms to one of the options listed below 2k 100k When 2k Is Selected When the record length exceeds 2 kpoint the DL850 DL850V removes data until there are only 2 kpoint and displays two points on each vertical line When the record length is less than 2 kpoint all the points are displayed When 100k Is Selected When the record length exceeds 100 kpoint the DL850 DL850V removes data until there are only 100 kpoint and displays 100 points on each vertical line When the record length is less than 100 kpoint all the points are displayed Li During hard disk recording and roll mode display if there are more than 100 points of data per div the maximum and minimum values for specified intervals of data are displayed through linear interpolation Accumulation Accumulate Ordinarily momentary waveform anomalies are difficult to recognize because the displayed waveform is updated whenever the trigger is activa
35. R ARs 2 Equation for the change in resistance when the shunt resistance is on In this manual the equation for parallel resistances is expressed as follows 1 _ RxRs 1 1 R Rs R Rs R Rs If AR from 1 and 2 is cancelled out Rs R x 1 K x K x Equation A General equation for calculating the shunt resistance includes error g Strain strain value that you want to be generated when the shunt resistance is turned on K Gauge factor R Bridge resistance AR Resistance change Rs Shunt resistance shunt resistance you want to derive App 16 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Detailed Equation V0 Ex R4 X R R2 Ry Ry R2 R3 Ry RERUM 1 Basic equation for a Wheatstone bridge When shunt calibration is on VO Ex Ry R3 R x RJA R R x Rg R4 i duadvertives cota need 2 Equation when shunt calibration is on R RgIRS oe 3 Equation for combined resistance R R R R Ry R 4 Since R to R are equal they are represented as R Also from the basic equation of strain VOIE K x 4 0 5 Basic equation of strain If VO E and R to R from 2 3 4 and 5 are cancelled out Rs R x 1 K x 2 K x Equation B Detailed equation for calculating the shunt resistance no error E Bridge voltage Vo Bridge output voltage R to R Bridge resistance R R R3 R Rs Shunt resis
36. Saves data in black and white Background Transparent or Opaque Background For PNG format you can save the waveform display area with a transparent background This feature is convenient when you want to compare waveforms by overlaying screen captures on the PC Normal Normal Saves data without changing the background not made transparent Transparent Transparent Saves data by making the background transparent Frame On or Off Frame For JPEG format you can add a white frame to the image to prevent the surrounding area from dropping out when the capture is printed ON The capture is saved with a frame OFF The capture is saved without a frame File Name Setting File Setup You can set file names comments and so on This is the same as the file feature Changing the comment also changes the built in printer and network printer comments P See here Printing or Saving a Screen Capture PRINT The screen capture is printed from the specified printer or saved to the specified file 17 2 IM DL850 01EN 18 Saving and Loading Data You can save the following kinds of data to an SD memory card USB storage device internal or external hard disk or network drive Waveform data setup data screen capture data snapshot waveform data automated measurement data of waveform parameters You can load the following types of data from a storage medium into the DL850 DL850V Waveform data setup data snapshot wave
37. See here IM DL850 01EN 2 1 2 Vertical Axis Voltage Measurement For voltage measurement the items that have to be set for each input signal CH1 to CH16 include vertical scales the vertical positions input coupling probe attenuation the bandwidth limit the zoom method the offset waveform inversion trace settings and linear scaling You can measure voltage by connecting probes measurement leads etc to one of the following voltage measurement modules 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO 10M12 701260 HV with RMS 720210 HS100M12 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701265 TEMP HPV 701275 ACCL VOLT For the probe connection method see section 3 5 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN For the measurement lead connection method see section 3 7 Waveform Display Display Labels Label Vertical Scale SCALE knob Waveform Vertical Position Vertical POSITION knob Input Coupling Coupling Probe Attenuation and Current to Voltage Conversion Ratio Probe Bandwidth Bandwidth Zoom Method V Scale Zooming by Setting a Magnification V Zoom Zooming by Setting Upper and Lower Display Limits Upper Lower Offset Offset Trace Settings Trace Setup nverted Waveform Display Invert Linear Scaling Linear Scale RMS Measurement Waveform Display Display Select whether to display each channel s input signal waveform ON Displays the
38. V or 3 V 12 V or 24 V supply voltage applied to the sensor The voltage range is automatically set to the optimum voltage range and the threshold level is automatically set to one half the voltage Pull up 5V Use this preset when the sensor output is open collector or contact output The pull up function is enabled only when this preset is selected The pull up voltage is approximately 5 V and the pull up resistor is 4 7 kO If you enable the pull up function set the input voltage to a value from 0 V to 5 V If the input voltage exceeds this range the protection circuit is tripped and the pull up resistor is automatically cut off Zero Cross ZeroCross Use this preset when the input voltage changes around 0 V The input coupling is automatically set to AC and the threshold level is automatically set to O V When you set the voltage range make sure that the maximum amplitude does not exceed the voltage range e AC100V AC200V Use this preset when measuring the supply voltage of 100 V or 200 V power supply systems The probe type is automatically set to 10 1 the voltage range is automatically set to a value suitable for the input voltage and probe factor and the coupling is automatically set to AC Be sure to use the isolated probe 700929 when measuring the power supply voltage Electromagnetic Pickup EM Pickup Use this preset when connecting an electromagnetic pickup directly The voltage range is automatically set to
39. Width Trigger Enhanced sssssssssssssssssseseseeeeeen nennen nnne nennen 4 14 Wave Window Trigger Enhanced ssssssssssssssseseseseeeenre nennen ennt nennen 4 15 Waveform Acquisition Record Length Record Length tnter tte Hee aeree deed Ue ded ee ve ide cene 5 1 Acquisition Mode Acquisition Mode ssssseeneenn emnes 5 2 Hard Disk Recording HD RecordCondition optional 5 4 iime Base Time Base dite eee LEER o eu se L Ro EE Re P EORR EE Lo IE ce Re L en Dec ER End 5 5 Dual Capture DUAL CAPTURE nennen enne iaaa nennen nennen enne 5 7 Captured Waveform Display Number Select Number see em 5 8 Waveform Acquisition START STOP cssssssseseseeeeeeeenen een nennen enne enne 5 10 Display Window Types DISPLAY cccccceceeceeeeeeeeenaeceeeeecaeceeeeeseaaeaeeeecaeaaecesegeeaaeeeeeseseaaeaeeeeeaeeaeeeeess 6 1 Display Format Format erinnere ces SIE eet reperi coser t ede teen Ire a aaae 6 2 Extra Window Extra Window esee e a ae ea a e a ee aaae daiat 6 2 Grid Graticule mnene ette cesi ena ER Tea ge p E bee poc eiie neds 6 2 Turning the Scale Value Display On and Off Scale Value seee em 6 3 Waveform Arrangement Color and Display Gr Trace Setup 6 3 Trace Label Display Trace Label 1 reticere ridetur era eden igi dene d dents 6 3 Level dicato CE 6 4 Interpolation Method
40. X CH4 X CH16 X State Condition Achievement Condition Condition Select whether the result of comparing the trigger source states to their specified conditions must be true or false for the state condition to be considered met True The result must be true False The result must be false Edge Detection Condition Edge Set the condition for detecting the trigger source edge f An edge is detected when the trigger source changes from a level below the trigger level to a level above the trigger level rising Y An edge is detected when the trigger source changes from a level above the trigger level to a level below the trigger level falling The signal is not used as a trigger condition Trigger Level Level and Trigger Hysteresis Hys Set these items for each trigger source These items are the same as the trigger level J See here and hysteresis gt See here of the simple trigger Trigger Hold Off Hold Off Trigger Position Position Trigger Delay Delay These items are the same as trigger hold off gt See here trigger position f See here and trigger delay P See here of the simple trigger 4 10 IM DL850 01EN 4 Triggering OR Trigger Enhanced The DL850 DL850V triggers on the OR of multiple trigger source edges Trigger Source You can use CH1 to CH16 and Bit 1 to Bit 8 as the trigger sources Bit 1 to Bit 8 appear as options when a logic input module is insta
41. Yes Threshold 1 5V Hys Yes Slope Yes Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up No Logic 12V Setup Item Setting V Range 20 V Coupling DC Probe Yes Bandwidth Yes Threshold 6V Hys Yes Slope Yes Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up No Logic 24V Setup Item Setting V Range x50 V Coupling DC Probe Yes Bandwidth Yes Threshold 12V Hys Yes Slope Yes Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up No App 23 Appendix Pull up 5V Setup Item Setting V Range 10 V Coupling DC Probe 1 1 Bandwidth Yes Threshold 2 5V Hys Yes Slope Yes Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up Yes ZeroCross Setup Item Setting V Range Yes Coupling AC Probe Yes Bandwidth Yes Threshold OV Hys Yes Slope Rising Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up No AC100V Setup Item Setting V Range 200 V Coupling AC Probe 10 1 Bandwidth Yes Full cannot be selected Threshold OV Hys Yes Slope Rising Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up No AC200V Setup Item Setting V Range 500 V Coupling AC Probe 10 1 Bandwidth Yes Full cannot be selected Threshold OV Hys Yes Slope Rising Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up No EM Pickup Setup Item Setting V Range 1V Coupling DC Probe 1 1 Bandwidth Yes Threshold OV Hys Yes Slope Rising Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up No App 24 IM DL850 01EN Appendix User Setup Item Setting V Range Yes Coupling Yes Probe Yes
42. also set the judgment logic action condition sequence and acquisition count and enable or disable synchronization with an external start signal Judgment Criterion Mode Select the judgment criterion from the following options X The condition is not used for GO NO GO determination IN The DL850 DL850V returns a GO result when the parameter is within the specified limits The DL850 DL850V returns a NO GO result when the parameter is outside the specified limits OUT The DL850 DL850V returns a GO result when the parameter is outside the specified limits The DL850 DL850V returns a NO GO result when the parameter is inside the specified limits Source Waveform Trace Set the waveform to use for GO NO GO determination to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 1 You can select the channel of an installed module However you cannot select the channel of a logic module 16 CH Voltage Input Module or CAN bus monitor module Waveform Parameter Item You can use all automatically measured waveform parameters as reference conditions You can perform GO NO GO determination on up to 16 parameters at the same time P See here Upper and Lower Parameter Limit Settings Upper Lower Depending on the parameter you can set the upper and lower limits within the range of 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Judgment Logic Logic Action Condition ActCondition Sequence Sequence Acquisition Count Acquisition Count and External Start E
43. an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it You cannot select Math7 or Math8 Li When analysis is performed on a linearly scaled channel the scaled values are used Window Function Window P See here Damping Rate Damping Rate You can configure this setting when Window is set to Exponential You can set the value in the range of 1 to 100 1 resolution The weight of the last data point is used as a damping rate with the weight of the first data point of the FFT computation taken to be 100 1 When the damping rate is set to 100 the window functions like a rectangular window This setting applies to the input and output response signals Force1 You can configure this setting when Window is set to Exponential Set the area over which computation is performed in terms of a percentage from the first FFT point taking the number of FFT points to be 10096 You can set the area to a value from 1 to 100 in 1 steps When the area is set to 100 the window functions like a rectangular window The outer area is the average of the results of the window function for the data outside the area This setting applies to the input s
44. and FFT Points Start Point Start Point Set the computation start point The default setting is 5 div Selectable range 5 div to 5 div The start point is similar to the settable range of the cursor display position in cursor measurement For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions P See here Number of FFT Points FFT Points You can set the number of points from the start of computation on the T Y waveform to one of the options below 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k 50k or 100k IM DL850 01EN 12 1 12 FFT Window Function Window You can select the window function from the following options Rect Rectangular window The rectangular window is suited to transient signals such as impulse waves which attenuate completely within the time window Hanning Hanning window The Hanning window encourages continuity of the signal by gradually attenuating the parts of the signal located near the ends of the time window down to the 0 level Hence it is suited to continuous signals The Hanning window has a higher frequency resolution than the flattop window FlatTop Flattop window The flattop window encourages continuity of the signal by gradually attenuating the parts of the signal located near the ends of the time window down to the 0 level Hence it is suited to continuous signals The flattop window has a higher spectral level accuracy than the flattop window Hamming Hamming window In the Hanning window the
45. at Power On Power On Action Setting Whether to Start Waveform Acquisition Start Select whether to start waveform acquisition at power on ON or not OFF Setting Whether to Turn the Action Function On or Off Action Select whether to enable the action function at power on ON or not OFF ON When the power is turned on the action mode setting is the same as it was when the power was turned off OFF When the power is turned on the action mode is off Logic Settings Logic Setup Logic Channel Display Format Numerical Format Choose whether to display the logic waveform values in the numeric monitor as binary Bit or hexadecimal Hex values Cursor Read Order Cursor Order Choose the order that you want to read the bit data from logic input signals in e 1 28 Bit 1 to bit 8 8 21 Bit 8 to bit 1 Bit Data Display Order Bit Order Choose the order that you want to display the bit data from logic input signals in e 1 28 Bit 1 to bit 8 8 21 Bit 8 to bit 1 Terminal Setup Terminal Setup Enabling or Disabling the Remote High STOP Signal Remote Stop Select whether to ignore ON the remote high STOP signal or not OFF Trigger Output Signal Trigger Out You can set the type of signal that is generated from the trigger output terminal to Normal or Pulse Trigger Output Signal Pulse Width Pulse Width When you set the trigger output signal type to Pulse you can set the pulse width to 1 ms 50 ms
46. be set to any setting other than OFF Notes about the Save Data and Save Image Actions P See here Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here IM DL850 01EN 13 5 14 Action On Trigger You can make the DL850 DL850V execute specified actions whenever a trigger occurs Mode Mode Select whether to use action on trigger OFF Action on trigger is not used ON The specified actions are executed whenever a trigger occurs Action Action Setup You can select the actions that are performed when a trigger occurs from the options below Beep Beep The DL850 DL850V sounds an alarm Screen Capture Printing Print Image The DL850 DL850V prints a screen capture to the specified printer You can specify a printer in the PRINT menu by setting Print to to Builtln built in printer or Network network printer P See here Waveform Data Saving Save Data The DL850 DL850V saves the waveform data to the specified destination SD card internal or external HD option USB storage device or network drive File Path File Path Specify where to save the file P See here Auto Naming Auto Naming File Name File Name Data Format Data Type These settings are the same as the auto naming file name and data format settings for saving waveform data P See here Li Changing the auto naming file name and data format settings for saving waveform data will change the auto naming file name
47. can turn the following channels on and off separately CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Maths 1 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed Select individual sub channels from the ones displayed 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed Select individual sub channels from the ones displayed If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it All ON All traces are turned on All OFF All traces are turned off Execute Select Execute to copy the settings Li When Trace is set to XY All Clear and Copy to are not available IM DL850 01EN 10 3 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the Delay Delay Setup The time difference between traces or the time difference from the trigger point to a rising or falling edge is called the delay between channels Period Count 1 Count N1 Reference waveform Mesial line Reference propa eee ne VE Source waveform Measure Reference waveform settings Source waveform settings e Polarity rising e Polarity t rising Edge Count N1 an integer Edge Count N1 an integer between 1 and 9 between 1 and 9 Mode Select a delay measurement mode OFF Delay measurement is not performed Time The delay between channels is displayed as a time Degree The delay bet
48. cannot be computed Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here 11 10 IM DL850 01EN 12 FFT You can display the power spectrum of an input waveform in the FFT window On models with user defined computation G2 option you can display up to two FFT waveforms and you can analyze the following spectrums in addition to the power spectrum However FFT analysis cannot be performed on waveforms stored through hard disk recording Linear spectrums power spectrum densities cross spectrums transfer functions and coherence functions Turning the FFT On and Off Display Set whether to perform FFT analysis If you set this to ON the FFT window appears ON FFT analysis is performed OFF FFT analysis is not performed Analysis Source Waveform Source Set the analysis source waveform to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math6 1 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 Ifthe 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it 4 You cannot select Math7 or Math8 Li When analysis is performed on a linearly scaled channel the scaled values are used Start Point and Number of FFT Points Start Point
49. clock signal of the waveform that is being measured Li When you control sampling using an external clock you cannot change the time axis setting To change the time axis display range change the record length or zoom in on the time axis P See here IM DL850 01EN 3 1 3 Horizontal Axis How the Time Axis Relates to the Display of the Waveform There are 10 div along the time axis and 1001 points logical number of points not the dots on the screen are used to draw the waveforms Therefore if the display record length is exactly 1 kpoint the number of acquired data points is 1001 the waveform is displayed using 1001 points However if the display record length is greater than or equal to 2 kpoint as shown in the figure on the right the DL850 DL850V draws the waveform by determining the maximum and minimum values at each fixed interval P P compression and aligning them vertically at the same time position total number of points 2002 Record length 2000 Sampled data C MU I p Maximum value M Ses Minimum value 9 LL Vertical axis b 1001 points T 1000 Time axis 1001 is the logical number of points On the screen the data is compressed to 800 or 500 dots 1000 dots in the full screen waveform display P P compression display Zooming Horizontally and D
50. computed according to the following equation using the elapsed time after the pulse input stops At Frequency f 1 elapsed time At The deceleration prediction starts after the pulse input stops and a pulse period T of the pulse one period before the pulse input stopped elapses Stop Prediction Stop Prediction The point at a specified time after the pulse input stops is considered a stop point and the frequency is set to 0 The time from the point when the pulse input stops to the point when the DL850 DL850V determines that the object has stopped can be set to 1 5 2 3 9 or 10 times 10 options the pulse period T of the pulse one period before the pulse input stopped 2 32 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Pulse input stop Txn n 1 5 to 10 I f I fo T Deceleration prediction f 1 At Stop prediction T 0 Input Setup Input Setup frequency measurement Presets Preset When you select a preset the DL850 DL850V automatically configures appropriate settings for all the signals for some preset options there are some settings that you will need to configure You can select User to set all the settings to user defined values There are 10 types of presets For details about the settings of each preset see appendix 6 Logic 5V Logic 3V Logic 12V Logic 24V Use this preset when the output from the sensor or other equivalent item changes in the range of 0 V to 5
51. current X Y waveforms when waveform acquisition is started through the pressing of the START STOP key ON X Y waveforms are cleared OFF X Y waveforms are not cleared Display Ratio of the Main Window Main Ratio P See here Window Layout Window Layout Set the display position of the X Y window Side Horizontal Vertical Vertical Combine Display Combine Display Choose whether to combine the two X Y windows into one window ON The windows are combined OFF The windows are not combined Interpolation Method Dot Connect When the number of data points is within the interpolation zone of the X Y waveform display the DL850 DL850V displays waveforms by interpolating between sampled data points Interpolation zone refers to the condition in which a given number of data points are not contained in the X Y waveform display The number of data points that define the interpolation zone varies depending on the display record length You can set the interpolation method to one of the options below OFF Displays the data using dots without interpolation Linear Interpolation Line Linearly interpolates between two points Diagram Explaining the Interpolation Method P See here Setting the Number of Data Points to Use for Waveform Display Decimation In the X Y waveform display the DL850 DL850V displays the acquired data by removing the data between fixed intervals You can set the number of points to use t
52. display position of the dual capture window Side Horizontal Vertical Vertical Format Format Set the display format of the dual capture window Main Main The same format as the main window 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 The dual capture window is broken up into the specified number of divisions Event Display Event Display You can display the points where triggering occurred during dual capturing as events When the waveform data is saved the event data is saved along with the main waveforms When you load the main waveforms the events are also loaded The locations of captured waveforms are indicated Trigger Trigger Event i T Main waveform 27 Waveforms That Are Captured Allocation The waveforms of the channels whose check boxes are selected in the allocation window and whose displays are turned on are displayed IM DL850 01EN 5 9 5 Waveform Acquisition Li When the main waveform acquisition mode is Average dual capturing cannot be executed Dual capturing cannot be performed during hard disk recording During dual capturing the DL850 DL850V may respond more slowly to operations Use the internal clock as the time base when you perform dual capturing You cannot perform dual capturing when an external clock is being used When you perform dual capturing all the previous waveform data is deleted Dual capturing cannot be performed on X Y waveforms The accumulate function cannot be
53. displayed on the screen and to set the measurement range Use the SCALE knob to set the vertical scale for each channel Vertical Position Because the DL850 DL850V can display many waveforms the waveforms may overlap and be difficult to view If this happens you can adjust the vertical display position to make waveforms easier to view vertical position Use the POSITION knob to set the vertical position for each channel Input Coupling You can change the input coupling setting to match the signal that you are measuring By changing the setting you can choose how the vertical axis voltage axis control circuit is coupled to the input signal The following types of input coupling are available DC AC GND TC DC RMS AC RMS ACCEL and OFF Set the appropriate input coupling for each input module You can only select OFF for sub channels on the 16 CH Voltage Input Module Sub channels set to OFF are not measured IM DL850 01EN 1 1 1 Main Features Vertical Zoom You can zoom the waveform vertically You can zoom the waveform by setting the vertical magnification or by setting upper and lower display limits Linear Scaling Linear scaling is a function that converts measured values into physical values and reads them directly There two types of linear scaling AX B Using scaling coefficient A and offset B the DL850 DL850V scales values according to the equation below Y AX B where X is the measured value and Y is
54. following trigger slope settings are available for triggering the DL850 DL850V 5 The DL850 DL850V triggers when the trigger source changes from a level below the trigger level to a level above the trigger level rising Y The DL850 DL850V triggers when the trigger source changes from a level above the trigger level to a level below the trigger level falling ft The DL850 DL850V triggers on both rising and falling edges f1can only be selected when a simple trigger is used with an analog trigger source 4 4 IM DL850 01EN 4 Triggering Trigger Hysteresis Hysteresis Noise rejection establishes a trigger level margin hysteresis so that the DL850 DL850V does not trigger if the signal level change is within the margin For each type of measured signal you can set the hysteresis around the trigger level to one of the options listed below You cannot set hysteresis when the trigger source is set to Time External Line or a logic signal rae 4 A Voltage Approx 0 1 div Approx 0 5 div Approx 1 div Temperature Approx 0 5 C K Approx 1 C K Approx 2 C K Strain Approx 2 5 of the Approx 12 5 of the Approx 25 of the range range range Acceleration Approx 0 1 div of the Approx 0 5 div of the Approx 1 div of the range range range Frequency Approx 0 01 div of the Approx 0 5 div of the Approx 1 div of the module range range range The above values are approximate va
55. n CR LF CR LF Float format Data is saved separately by channel Measured data for CH1 on record 1 Measured data for CH1 on record 2 Measured data for CH1 on record N Measured data for CH2 on record 1 Measured data for CH2 on record 2 Measured data for CH2 on record N IM DL850 01EN 18 5 18 Saving and Loading Data Saving Setup Data Setup You can save the DL850 DL850V setup information to the specified storage medium The extension is SET Save Destination File List File Name File Name Comment Comment P See here Saving to Internal Memory You can save setup data to internal memory from the Store Recall menu P See here Saving Other Types of Data Others You can save the following types of data Save Destination File List File Name File Name Comment Comment P See here Data Type Data Type Screen capture Screen Image You can save the displayed screen image to a file in PNG BMP or JPEG format You can also save the screen image from the menu that appears when you press the PRINT MENU key Snapshot waveforms Snap You can save the waveform data captured in a snapshot The extension is SNP Measure Measure You can save the results of the automated measurement of waveform parameters to a file in CSV format Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Measure Save the results of automatic waveform parameter measurement to
56. on the screen Normally the acquisition memory record length and display record length are the same but the time axis setting may cause them to differ When you change the time axis setting the sample rate and record length also change On the standard model of the DL850 DL850V you can set the record length to a value between 1 kpoint and 250 Mpoint On models with the M2 option you can set the length to up to 2 Gpoint On models with the HDO option or HD1 option and the M2 option when you enable hard disk recording you can set the record length to up to 50 Gpoint For details about the record lengths that can be set see appendix 2 in the getting started guide IM DL850 03EN Use a long time axis setting when you want to observe a phenomenon over a long period of time When you want to observe a phenomenon at a high time resolution set a long record length and raise the sample rate When the record length is long computation and measurement processing take longer than when the record length is short The amounts of time for which you can record data to the acquisition memory when the record length is 2 Gpoint are listed below Sample Rate In Seconds In Minutes In Hours In Days 100 MS s 20 0 33 0 0056 0 00023 10 MS s 200 3 33 0 056 0 0023 1 MS s 1800 30 0 50 0 021 100 kS s 18000 300 5 0 0 21 10 kS s 180000 3000 50 2 1 1 kS s 1728000 28800 480 20 500 S s 2593000 43217 720 30 The following limitations on wav
57. order EC 20 8 recall 20 2 record length es 5 1 referenco cycles curan die eie a 4 16 reference junction compensation ussssssss 2 20 remote control 20 3 resynchronization jump width 2 38 RMS measurement 2 15 roll mode display ciere t rete n 3 3 S Page sample point CAN 2 38 sample rate es 3 3 samples number of CAN 2 38 sampling timing ssssssssseeeeenneeenne 3 1 SCALE KOD niie innne ente dee pe rcs d ee bs 2 3 scale value es 6 3 caling mode 5 t Ned acted coe re i Ege tete 11 4 Screen captures printing esseeeen 17 1 Index 2 IM DL850 01EN Screen captures SAVING ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteteeeeeeeees 17 2 SCA Ce scvcreieassivestconcenetice self test m Sensitivity ccn ie c e ce i v et sensor Setting t e ee e ES settings initializing A setup data loading sssssssseene set p data saving ecc ner eret a setup data storing and recalling 20 2 shunt calibration sishni adi 2 24 App 13 simple trigger 4 3 smoothingxs circus ih ath nett ae Biola eee 2 31 SNAPSNOE ec iie ce de tree ues genteel aes 20 2 SNTP 19 7 spectrum type 12 3 START STOP e 5 10 Start polnt oie deut ede che edo ee
58. point stop point Waveform Area S So Area enclosed by a curve connecting the start and stop points Start point 3 Loop Tracing a Figure Eight Y A S So S gy tme AA 0 A gt Start point y Stop point 4 Loop Tracing a Spiral Area S S x 2 84 The number of overlaps varies according to the number of loops Stop point IM DL850 01EN App 1 Appendix Integ2XY 1 When Each Y Data Point Corresponds to a Single X Data Point 1 Start point Stop point So Area S So X axis Y 0 2 Stop point Start point So Area S So X axis Y 0 3 X axis Y 0 So Area S S Start point Stop point 4 X axis Y 0 So Area S So Stop point Start point 2 When the Waveform Extends into the Negative Side Start point PP X axis Y 0 XS Area S S Si Stop point 3 When Multiple Y Data Corresponds to One Point of X Data Start point AreaS So So Stop point X axis Y 0 Start point Area S So 2 x S4 S2 X axis Y 0 App 2 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Appendix 2 User Defined Computation Optional Digital Filter Type Type Bandwidth Gauss Gaussian LowPass Sharp LowPass HighPass BandPass IIR Butterworth LowPass HighPass BandPass Filter Order See the following table for the filter orders 2 5 10 20 30 Cutoff Gauss LowPass 49 21 9 5 5 Sharp LowPass 88 36 18 9 8 HighPass 159
59. position of one of the zoom boxes to the right side of the screen where the most recent data is When the waveform flows from the right to the left of the screen as in roll mode you can zoom in on the waveform where it starts from on the right side of the screen These menu items do not appear when the source waveform of the Zoom2 window is set to Zoom1 Auto Scroll Auto Scroll This feature automatically moves the zoom position in the specified direction You can view the waveform and stop scrolling at the appropriate position kK Zooms in on the left edge of the Main window Zooms in on the right edge of the Main window Starts scrolling to the left Starts scrolling to the right Stops scrolling BVAY Speed Speed You can select the auto scrolling speed Selectable range 1 to 10 The default setting is 4 Waveforms That Are Zoomed Allocation The waveforms of the channels whose check boxes are selected in the allocation window and whose displays are turned on are displayed IM DL850 01EN 8 3 9 Cursor Measurement You can move cursors on the waveforms displayed on the screen to view the measured values at the points where the cursors intersect the waveforms Window Selection Select Window Select the window to perform cursor measurement in This option appears when X Y or FFT waveforms are being displayed T Y Displays T Y waveform cursor measurement values e X Y Displays the cursor measurement values
60. positions coincide Display record length lt 0 T Trigger position 100 Pre trigger section Post trigger section Selectable range 0 0 to 100 of the display record length Resolution 0 1 Li When waveform acquisition is stopped if you change the trigger position the setting is not applied until you start waveform acquisition and update the waveforms f you change the time axis setting using the TIME DIV knob the location of the trigger position does not change Time Reference Point In addition to the trigger position a time reference point is indicated The times that appear in the lower left and right of the screen are the times from this time reference point The cursor time measurement values are also based on this reference point When waveform acquisition is stopped the displayed location of the time reference point varies as indicated below In Update Mode When the displayed waveform is updated by the trigger the time reference point is displayed as indicated below The time reference point and the trigger point are the same Under Normal Waveform Update Conditions When All Pre Trigger and Post Trigger Data Has Been Acquired The trigger position and the time reference point are displayed at the same position T When Waveform Acquisition Is Stopped before All Pre Trigger and Post Trigger Data Has Been Acquired Th
61. sensitivity You can set the offset for each channel The offset is useful when you are measuring voltage or using the frequency module to measure frequency or some other value Voltage sensitivity 1 000 V div 1 000 Vidiv 0 500 Vidiv Vertical position 0 00 div 1 00 div 1 00 div Offset voltage 0 000 V 2 000 V 2 000 V Vertical ial en E S S S S a S position d mark a Ground level mark Selectable Range of the Offset When measuring voltage 5 div For the frequency module the range varies depending on what is being measured When measuring frequency Value div x 1000 or 200 kHz When measuring revolutions in rpm Value div x 1000 or 50 krpm When measuring revolutions in rps Value div x 1000 or 1000 rps When measuring periods Value div x 1000 or 50 s When measuring duty ratios Value div x 1000 or 100 When measuring pulse widths Value div x 1000 or 50 s When measuring pulse integration Value div x 1000 or 1 0000E 22 When measuring velocity Value div x 1000 or 1 0000E 22 Notes about Setting the Offset When you are measuring voltage changes to the offset are applied when acquisition is stopped When you are measuring the frequency or some other value using the frequency module changes to the offset are not applied when acquisition is stopped The
62. setting restart the DL850 DL850V 19 4 IM DL850 01EN 19 Ethernet Communication Optional Mail Mail You can send trigger times and other information in emails to a specific email address as an action in the action on trigger or GO NO GO determination feature Mail Server Mail Server Specify the IP address of the mail server on the network that the DL850 DL850V will use In a network with a DNS server you can specify the host name and domain name instead of the IP address Mail Address Mail Address You can specify multiple email recipient addresses Separate each address with a comma Comment Comment If necessary you can enter a comment in the first line of e mails Attaching Image Files Attached Image File You can attach a capture of the screen that is displayed at the time the email is sent File format The format that you set in the FILE menu for saving screen captures File name DL_image time extension Example DL Image1006171158 extension is a screen capture taken at 11 58 on June 17 2010 Resolution XGA 1024x768 dots Approximate File Size Normal screen Approx 50 KB Maximum Approx 1 6 MB when the screen contains many colors Timeout Timeout If the DL850 DL850V cannot send an email for the amount of time specified here it disconnects from the mail server Sending a Test Mail Send Test Mail You can send a test mail to check whether emails can be sent properly IM DL850 01EN 19 5
63. signal T One cycle of the input signal 0 Given u t Vmsinwt where Vm is the peak value and w is the angular velocity of 2rrf with f being the frequency of the sine wave signal the RMS value Vrms is 1 2T 2 V zx 2 ie Vmsinwt dwt 2 Vrms Average of u t over one cycle f m TE As shown in the example above if Vm is 2 V the RMS value Vrms is approximately 1 4 V DC RMS Use this setting when you want to observe the RMS values of the entire signal including both the DC and AC components Example When you measure the RMS values of a 2 Vpeak sine wave with a 1 VDC component superimposed on it an approximately 1 7 VDC signal appears as shown in the figure on the right 2 Vpeak 1 Vdc RENE Approx 1 7 V a Given DC component Vdc and AC component u t Vmsinwt the RMS value Vrms DC of a sine wave signal with a DC component superimposed on it is 1 2T 2 Vm V 3 Vrms DC Um Vmsinwt Vdc dwt 32 Vdc 0 As shown in the example above if Vdc is 1 V and Vm is 2 V the RMS value Vrms DC is approximately 1 7 V Li In RMS measurement mode when a signal with an AC component below 40 Hz is acquired because of the characteristics of the RMS circuit a ripple component is displayed and the RMS values are not displayed properly DC signals are measured properly IM DL850
64. siii oec rei es qp eee pete ee egies dede eb e defe Ede Des teehee aed 15 5 Notes about Searching Waveforms sss enne nnne nenne 15 5 Displaying and Searching History Waveforms Display Mode Display Mode ssse eene eem eene rennen enne nennen nennt 16 2 Highlighting Selected Record 1 eene eere rede ite ite nee rende cete deve aides 16 2 Display Range Start and End Record ssssssssssssseeeeeeene enm eene eren 16 3 List of History Waveforms List Abe ae erie rele e be te ege ede bye giten 16 3 History Waveform Search Mode Search Mode ssssseeee eem 16 4 Search Condition Settings for Zone Searching Search Setup sssssssss 16 4 Search Condition Settings for Waveform Parameter Searching Search Setup 16 5 Search Execution Execute Search nennen nee errem nnns 16 5 Notes about Using the History Feature ssssssssssssssssssssesene ener entente 16 5 Printing and Saving Screen Captures Destination Type Print T9 2 0 cuiii eset a aaa costes rodea ce da tren ee 17 1 Printing from the Built In Printer Builtln option ssssssee nen 17 1 Printing from a Network Printer Network sssssssssssseseseeen nennen ennt enne 17 1 Saving Screen Captures to Files File 17 2 Printing or Saving a Screen Capture PRINT ssseseeee
65. smoothing filter Filter order 50 ms 99000 0Hz a The accuracy improves when the smoothing filter is used 2000 00ns 0 00ns Pulse Averaging PulseAverage The input pulses are divided into groups of a specified number 1 to 4096 pulses and measured Pulse averaging has the following characteristics Enables you to eliminate the effects of missing pulses and inconsistent pulse intervals inconsistencies in the frequency or period waveform on measurement Evenif you use pulse averaging the measured results are displayed as per pulse values so there is no need to reperform scaling Pulse averaging can be used in measurements of frequencies revolutions periods power supply frequencies pulse integration and velocities JLLLELLLILLLL LDLLLELLALTLALLE DLLILLILLIDLTOL N When pulse averaging is not used Deceleration and Stop Prediction The 701280 FREQ automatically performs internal computation and displays waveforms by predicting the deceleration curve and stop point even when the input pulse is suddenly cut off This function enables the measurement of waveforms of deceleration behavior that are close to the actual physical phenomenon in applications in which the deceleration behavior of an object that has inertia is measured such as in automobile brake tests Deceleration Prediction Deceleration Prediction 1 when pulse averaging is used The deceleration curve is
66. that have to be set for each input signal CH1 to CH16 include vertical scales the vertical positions input coupling the bias the bandwidth limit the zoom method the gain trace settings sensitivity and the unit The 701275 ACCL VOLT acceleration module with AAF can measure acceleration by using the signal from an acceleration sensor You can connect it directly to an acceleration sensor with a built in amp Load output type acceleration sensors without amp circuits cannot be connected directly to the 701275 ACCL VOLT For information about how to connect acceleration sensors see section 3 11 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN Waveform Display Display Select whether to display each channel s input signal waveform ON Displays the waveform OFF Does not display the waveform Labels Label P See here Vertical Scale SCALE knob P See here Waveform Vertical Position Vertical POSITION knob P See here Input Coupling Coupling To measure acceleration with the 701275 ACCL VOLT set the input coupling to ACCEL To measure voltage set the input coupling to an appropriate voltage measurement setting P See here Bias Bias Select whether to supply bias current to the acceleration sensor ON Bias current is supplied to the acceleration sensor OFF Bias current is not supplied to the acceleration sensor Li Donot connect an acceleration sensor when Bias is set to ON Doing so may damag
67. the DL850 DL850V is connected to the network as an Web server the following features become available Web Server You can display the DL850 DL850V screen on the PC and start and stop measurement through the Ethernet network You can refresh the DL850 DL850V screen that is displayed on the PC and take screen captures PC Operations Setting the Screen Update Rate You can set the update rate to 5 s 10 s 30 s or 60 s Screen Update Start The display starts updating automatically at the rate that you specify Screen Update Stop You can stop the updating of the display Manually Update the Screen You can update the display manually START STOP You can start and stop measurement on the DL850 DL850V Full Screen Capture You can take full screen screen captures PC System Requirements P See here Li You need Adobe Flash Player version 8 or later to use the Web server function When visiting this Web site the most recent Flash Player is automatically downloaded If the download does not begin please obtain the latest Flash Player from the Adobe Web site When using the full screen capture function be sure to disable pop up blockers on your browser The Web server function is unavailable when printing on the instrument or manipulating files The Web server function can also not be used if the instrument is connected to a PC while the Mass Storage setting is enabled on the PC After disconnecting the PC or enabling the USBTMC
68. the display mode is set to All or Average Selectable range 0 to the number of waveform acquisitions 1 List of History Waveforms List The history waveform record numbers and the times when the waveforms were acquired are listed IM DL850 01EN 16 3 16 Displaying and Searching History Waveforms H istory Waveform Search Mode Search Mode When waveform acquisition is stopped you can search for history waveforms that meet the specified conditions OFF Searching is not performed All history waveforms are displayed Zone The DL850 DL850V searches for history waveforms that did or did not pass through a specified search zone Parameter The DL850 DL850V searches for history waveforms that do or do not meet specified search parameter conditions Search Condition Settings for Zone Searching Search Setup Search Zone Select Zone You can register four search zones to Zone1 to Zone4 For each search zone set the channels to search the search condition and the search range Search Condition Condition IN The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms that pass through the specified search window OUT The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms that do not pass through the specified search window OFF The DL850 DL850V does not search for waveforms Source Waveforms Source The DL850 DL850V searches through the waveforms that you select for Source You can select waveforms from CH1 to CH16 The waveforms of channe
69. the hysteresis See here of the simple trigger Trigger Hold Off Hold Off Trigger Position Position Trigger Delay Delay These items are the same as trigger hold off See here trigger position J See here and trigger delay P See here of the simple trigger IM DL850 01EN 4 11 4 Triggering AND Trigger Enhanced The DL850 DL850V triggers on the AND of multiple trigger source conditions The DL850 DL850V triggers when all the specified conditions are met at a single point Trigger Source You can use CH1 to CH16 and Bit 1 to Bit 8 as the trigger sources Bit 1 to Bit 8 appear as options when a logic input module is installed in a slot P See here Achievement Condition Condition Set the achievement condition for each trigger source H The signal level must be high L The signal level must be low IN The signal must be within the specified level range OUT The signal must be outside of the specified level range The signal is not used as a trigger condition Nand OUT are only selectable when the trigger source is an analog signal CH1 to CH16 Trigger Level Level Set this item for each trigger source When the Achievement Condition Is H or L Set the level for determining whether the trigger sources are high or low P See here When the Achievement Condition Is IN or OUT An edge is detected when the trigger source enters IN or leaves OUT the specified level range You can specif
70. the new folder File Name File Name You can set the common file name that is used when the auto naming feature is turned off or when the auto naming feature is set to Numbering The maximum number of characters that you can use for file names and folder names is 64 characters The following restrictions apply The following types of characters can be used 0 to 9 Ato Z a toz L 96 amp and cannot be entered consecutively 18 2 IM DL850 01EN 18 Saving and Loading Data The following character strings cannot be used due to MS DOS limitations AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM COM8 or COM9 Make sure that the full file path absolute path from the root directory is less than or equal to 260 characters in length If it exceeds 260 characters an error occurs when you perform a file operation such as save copy rename or create folder When an operation is being performed on a folder the full path is up to the name of the folder When an operation is being performed on a file the full path is up to the name of the file The following additional restrictions apply when you use the file name auto naming feature f you set auto naming to Numbering file names will be eight characters long A file name will consist of the four characters that you entered for the file name and a four character sequence
71. the same as the trigger level J See here and hysteresis f See here of the simple trigger Trigger Hold Off Hold Off Trigger Position Position Trigger Delay Delay These items are the same as trigger hold off J See here trigger position J See here and trigger delay P See here of the simple trigger 4 8 IM DL850 01EN 4 Triggering A Delay B Trigger Enhanced After state condition A is met and the specified amount of time elapses the DL850 DL850V triggers when state condition B is first met Met Met Delay time Blot passes rigger Trigger Source You can use CH1 to CH16 and Bit 1 to Bit 8 as the trigger sources Bit 1 to Bit 8 appear as options when a logic input module is installed in a slot P See here State Conditions A State B State To set state conditions A and B select the states of the trigger sources in relation to the trigger level Example State Condition State Condition A B CH1 H H CH2 L L CH3 Bit 1 L H Bit 2 H X Bit 8 X L CH4 X X CH16 X H H The signal level must be high L The signal level must be low X The signal is not used as a condition State Condition Achievement Condition A Condition B Condition Select how the result of comparing the trigger source states to their specified conditions must change for a state condition to be considered met Enter The result must change from not being met
72. to use it at a bridge voltage that is within the transducer s recommended voltage range Balancing cannot be performed if there is no strain measurement bridge bridgehead or strain gauge transducer connected to the channel that you are trying to perform balancing on When you perform balancing on all channels if balancing fails on even one of the channels an error message will appear along with information about the channels for which balancing failed After you turn on the power connect a new strain gauge or change the measurement range bridge voltage or gauge factor you need to perform balancing again before you perform measurement The scale value is displayed as imbalance immediately after you turn on the power or when you change the range In this kind of situation perform balancing When you change the unit of a channel the units for all the items related to the channel change This includes the upper and lower limits trigger level automated measurement values of waveform parameters and cursor measurement values IM DL850 01EN 2 23 2 Vertical Axis About Shunt Calibration Only on the 701271 STRAIN_DSUB The 701271 STRAIN_DSUB strain module supports shunt calibration Shunt calibration is a type of scaling in which the strain measurement gain is adjusted through the connection in parallel of a known resistance the resistance for shunt calibration hereinafter referred to as the shunt resistance to the str
73. us 10 s 0 01 us for B TimeOut x T1 0 01us to 9999999 99us 0 01us MT T2 0 02us to 10000000 00us 10s 0 02 us Li Triggering may not function properly when the interval between achievement times is less than 0 01 us or when the duration of the achievement time is less than 0 01 us Typical 4 14 IM DL850 01EN 4 Triggering Trigger Level Level and Trigger Hysteresis Hys Set these items for each trigger source These items are the same as the trigger level See here and hysteresis f See here of the simple trigger Trigger Hold Off Hold Off Trigger Position Position Trigger Delay Delay These items are the same as trigger hold off gt See here trigger position gt See here and trigger delay gt See here of the simple trigger Wave Window Trigger Enhanced The DL850 DL850V creates real time templates Wave Window using a number of cycles directly preceding the current waveforms The DL850 DL850V compares the current waveforms to the real time templates and triggers if one of the current waveforms falls outside of its real time template Reference cycles example the waveforms for the four previous cycles Current waveform s N Measured waveform NY N Ak SJ v Average of 1 2 or 4 cycles Real time template 4 Trigger gt Tolerance mp width Average waveform The DL850 DL850V compares tolerance width the current waveform to the real time tem
74. used Computation cannot be performed on captured waveforms When the automated measurement of waveform parameters is enabled the time it takes for the DL850 DL850V to enter the trigger ready state may become longer after a captured waveform is acquired The history feature cannot be used on waveform data acquired through dual capturing Waveform Acquisition START STOP When you start waveform acquisition the DL850 DL850V stores waveform data to the acquisition memory and updates the displayed waveforms each time it triggers The acquisition memory is divided into many areas based on the set record length and the maximum number of acquirable waveforms are stored in the memory You can recall past waveforms that are stored in the memory by using the history feature when waveform acquisition is stopped DL850 DL850V Operation When the Acquisition Mode Is Set to Averaging Averaging stops when you stop acquisition f you start acquisition again averaging starts from the beginning START STOP Key Operations during Accumulation Accumulation stops when you stop waveform acquisition When you start acquisition again the displayed waveforms up to that point are cleared and accumulation restarts from the beginning The START STOP Key Is Disabled When the DL850 DL850V is in remote mode When the DL850 DL850V is printing to a printer when it is being set up automatically or when it is accessing a storage medium o
75. values at the ends become 0 and the signal components there do not affect the spectrum The Hamming window is a corrected Hanning window Its characteristics are similar to those of the Hanning window but the frequency resolution of its main beam is greater than that of the Hanning window The Hamming window is suited for dividing close signals Exponential Exponential The exponential window removes noise from the signal It can only be selected on models with the user defined computation option The exponential window is suited for the signals of impulse excitation frequency response tests and other similar signals Time windows Integral Power spectrum Al Rectangular Sine wove E Flattop T TR Th LL E g Rm E Rectangular W t u t u t T u t Step function Hanning W t 0 5 0 5cos 2n Flattop W t 0 54 0 46 cos 201 Hamming W t 0 54 0 46cos am sin 2n 1 2t T 2n 1 2UT For details about the exponential window see appendix 2 Vertical Scale Vert Scale Mode You can select the method for setting the vertical scale from the following options Auto The center and scale of the vertical axis are set automatically Manual The center and scale of the vertical axis must be set manually Center Scale Center Sensitive When Vert Scale Mode is set to Manual set th
76. waveform OFF Does not display the waveform Labels Label You can specify a name of up to eight characters in length for each channel You can set whether to display labels using the DISPLAY menu P See here Li The waveform display on off setting changes to the waveform acquisition on off setting in cases such as during hard disk recording and when an increase in the record length places a limitation on the number of channels that can be used The specified display label is used in labels scale values the numeric display and cursor measurement values Depending on the display and zoom formats label names may not appear when the waveform display is narrow 2 2 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Vertical Scale SCALE knob Voltage Scale Setting The vertical scale is used to adjust the displayed waveform amplitude so that you can easily view signals Set the vertical scale by voltage per grid square V div or current per grid square A div on the screen Use the SCALE knob to set the vertical scale for each channel and sub channel The same SCALE knob is used to adjust the scale of each channel and sub channel To change the vertical scale of a channel press the key from CH1 to CH16 that corresponds to the channel To change the vertical scale of a sub channel press an odd channel key from CH1 to CH15 and then press the Soft key that corresponds to the sub channel The vertical scale changes when you switch t
77. when The display is in roll mode The trigger mode is Single N Single or On Start The dual capture feature is being used Data is being recorded to a hard disk To average waveforms that have been acquired in N Single mode set the acquisition mode to Normal and set the history feature s display mode to Averaging Logic waveforms and CAN monitor module waveforms cannot be averaged Acquisition Count Acquisition Count The ranges within which you can set the waveform acquisition count are indicated below If you select Infinite the DL850 DL850V continues waveform acquisition until you stop it using the START STOP key The default setting is Infinite Changes to the number of acquisitions are not applied during waveform acquisition They are applied after acquisition stops When the acquisition mode is set to Normal Envelope or BoxAverage 1 to 65536 in steps of 1 or Infinite When the acquisition mode is set to Average 2 to 65536 in 2 steps or Infinite Li The number of waveforms that have been stored to the acquisition memory appears in the lower left of the Screen IM DL850 01EN 5 3 5 Waveform Acquisition Trigger Mode Trigger Mode P See here Hard Disk Recording HD RecordCondition optional When measurement starts you can record data an external hard disk that supports eSATA external Serial ATA HDO option or to an internal hard disk HD1 option The recorded data is saved to files a
78. 00 When using the 720230 LOGIC x0 1 to x3 33 Zoom Position Zooming is centered on the vertical position Vertical position mark a CX I A ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee E Ground level mark Tidiv 1Vv When V Zoom is set to x2 11div20 5V IM DL850 01EN 2 9 2 Vertical Axis Zooming by Setting Upper and Lower Display Limits Upper Lower When V Scale is set to SPAN you can set the upper and lower vertical limits and enlarge or reduce the waveform along the vertical axis By setting the appropriate upper and lower limits for the displayed waveform you can zoom in vertically on the area of the waveform that you want to observe You can also increase the display range to view parts of the waveform that were outside the range Zooming the waveform does not change its A D conversion resolution or accuracy 10 V 6V _ a Zoom L 4V 10V 2V Selectable Range of the Upper and Lower Limits The upper and lower limits can be set within 100 x the specified V div value or 2000 V whichever is lower Set the limits so that the upper limit is greater than the lower limit The range of the upper and lower limits for the 701270 STRAIN NDIS and 701271 STRAIN DSUB varies as indicated below depending on the range uni
79. 00 to Month Second 999 that is appended when the Day Minute size of a single file exceeds 2 GB Hour The underscore and three digit serial number are not appended to the file name when the file size is 2 GB or less However when a file is saved through the hard disk recording feature an underscore and the three digit serial number 000 are appended to the file name even if the file size does not exceed 2 GB Auto Naming Auto Naming Numbering Numbering The DL850 DL850V automatically adds a four digit number from 0000 to 9999 after the common name specified using the File Name setting up to four characters and saves files Date Date The file name is the date and time down to ms when the file is saved The file name specified using the File Name setting is not used OFF Disables the auto naming feature The name that you specify using the File Name setting is used If there is a file with the same name in the save destination folder you cannot save the data Save Destination during Hard Disk Recording and Action Execution In the specified drive a folder is automatically created with the date year month and day as its name and data is saved to that folder using file names specified by the auto naming feature If the number of files in the save destination folder exceeds 1000 a new folder is automatically created with the date and an incremented sequence number 000 to 999 as its name and the data continues to be saved in
80. 01EN 2 15 2 Vertical Axis Voltage Measurement For the 16 CH Voltage Input Module When you measure voltages using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module the items that you have to set for each input signal sub channel 1 to sub channel 16 include vertical scales the vertical positions input coupling the bandwidth limit the zoom method the offset waveform inversion trace settings and linear scaling You can connect wiring to the input terminals of the 720220 16 CH Voltage Input Module 16CH VOLT to measure voltages on 16 channels For information about how to connect the wiring see section 3 13 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN Waveform Display Display You can select whether to display each module s input signal waveforms You can turn the display of each main channel CH1 CH3 CH5 and CH7 on and off ON Displays the waveform OFF Does not display the waveform Li The 16 CH Voltage Input Module only uses the odd main channels of the slot that it is inserted into It cannot use the slot s even main channels Onthe 16 CH Voltage Input Module turning the display of a waveform on or off turns the displays of all of the module s sub channels on or off To turn off the display of individual sub channels turn off their input coupling Setting All Sub Channels All SubChannels Setup You can configure the settings of all sub channels while viewing the settings in a list You can also copy the various vertical a
81. 1 2 3 and so on The waveform and timestamp that correspond to the record number you specify here are highlighted Selectable range 0 to the number of waveform acquisitions 1 16 2 IM DL850 01EN 16 Displaying and Searching History Waveforms Maximum Number of Waveform Acquisitions Maximum number of history waveforms that can be stored in the acquisition memory The number of history waveforms that can be stored varies depending on the selected record length and the installed memory options as follows Record Length Number of Waveforms No options M1 Option M2 Option 250 Mpoint 1 Gpoint 2 Gpoint 1 kpoint 5000 5000 5000 2 5 kpoint 5000 5000 5000 5 kpoint 2976 5000 5000 10 kpoint 1487 5000 5000 25 kpoint 593 2381 5000 50 kpoint 295 1189 2381 100 kpoint 144 583 1168 250 kpoint 57 236 474 500 kpoint 28 116 235 1 Mpoint 13 54 111 2 5 Mpoint 4 22 46 5 Mpoint 1 10 22 10 Mpoint 1 4 10 25 Mpoint 1 1 4 50 Mpoint 1 1 1 100 Mpoint 18 1 1 250 Mpoint 14 1 1 500 Mpoint 18 1 1 Gpoint 14 18 2 Gpoint 14 1 Only eight channels worth of history waveforms are acquired 2 Only four channels worth of history waveforms are acquired 3 Only two channels worth of history waveforms are acquired 4 Only one channel s worth of history waveforms are acquired This record length cannot be set Display Range Start and End Record Using record numbers set the range of history waveforms to display when
82. 1 Trigger Types Type 2 etie nite nderit e aerei ee Pede Duce dede eiad ene ge dee den eade c 4 2 Signal Type and Trigger Type Combinations esseee emere 4 2 Basic Trigger Settings ee a ette vi de E ee 4 2 Siete 4 3 Trigger Source Source eene rete e e de dete dti xe ette e Pere de Pede aede dnte Ree Ten 4 3 Trigger Level Level a ite tet oe ter eee io tr ede eite deat eee DE eee es deque dd eels 4 4 Trigger Slope Slope r edere Ue 4 4 Trigger Hysteresis HySteresis ccccceccececeeceeeeeeeaececeeeceeaeeeeeesesaeaeceeceeaaeceeeeseesaeaeeseseeaeaeeeeees 4 5 Trigger Hold OIf Hold Off 9 iier eene ne ent Re Rer Phe e NER PRSE PER EE Ronin 4 5 Trigger Position Position snes 1 11 iter herd uod coded cede De SER d ase batted 4 6 IM DL850 01EN Contents Trigger Delay Delay eiccissidies e aaiae ad a anarias 4 7 A B N Trigger Enhanced ripis tte asi eedete cd nein tege tere dente edd ne deerunt 4 8 A Delay B Trigger Enhanced itte t tete te reete eee dette rds ix pacedee 4 9 Edge On A Trigger Enhanced sssssssssssssesssssse eene nnne nne nen nnne nnne enne 4 10 OR Trigger Enhanced tee elei Rees eee Panne re E Ge Fay e Une te e aA ee ped 4 11 AND Trigger Enhanced terere He eb EE 4 12 Period Trigger Enhancad rr itcceiteci eeetetee t ioe e a speed codec Eee e peiores need 4 13 Pulse
83. 1 V and the threshold level is automatically set to 0 V User Defined User Use this preset to configure user defined input conditions The pull up function cannot be enabled Li When measuring high voltages exceeding 42 V AC DCpeak on the 701280 FREQ be sure to use the isolated probe 700929 Use EM Pickup only when connecting an electromagnetic pickup When the EM Pickup preset is selected the LEDs of the frequency module do not illuminate in red even when the range is exceeded The DL850 DL850V does not support electromagnetic pickups that need to have power supplied to them or pickups that require terminators at the output Handle these types of electromagnetic pickups using sensors Keep the output of the electromagnetic pickup within 42 Vp p The minimum sensitivity is 0 2 Vp p If the output is less than the minimum sensitivity the measured values may be unstable When you use the pull up function do not let the voltage go outside the range of 0 to 5 V If the voltage goes outside of this range the protection circuit will be tripped and the pull up circuit will be cut off IM DL850 01EN 2 33 2 Vertical Axis The following 9 setup items are available Voltage Range V Range You can set the input voltage range FS to one of the options below When the probe attenuation Probe is set to 1 1 1 V 2 V 5 V 10 V 20 V 50 V FS When the probe attenuation Probe is set to 10 1 10
84. 1957 or 701958 Bridgehead 701957 701958 with shunt calibration support B8023WP Sense Bridge Bridge 9 Bridge o 5 5 Bridge 3 6 Input 8 c 2 Input 7 n SNe Sense 5 GND 52 terminal E B Bridge Sense 2 ngo 9 Shuntcal 4 Shuntcal 3 1 Floating Shell Shield Casen Common The shield is connected to The floating common of the Z The connector shell is the bridgehead case and the module is grounded within the connected to the case measuring instrument case bridgehead potential of the bridgehead Measurement instrument 1 The GND floating common of the module example DL850 is connected to the case potential inside the bridge box 2 The bridgehead case the cable shield and Sense Module the measuring instrument case are Sense 701271 connected as measures against noise 9 Bridge STRAIN_DSUB 6 Power He 5 Sense Sense shuntcal Shuntcal 3 Ke on off 1 Shuntcal Shell Floati All module V Hoating signals Common are isolated Case The connector shell is connected to the case potential of the measuring instrument 2 When correcting the gain on the negative side normal Shunt calibration relay circuit Built into the strain module Shunt r
85. 1EN 2 Vertical Axis Displaying the Menu for Configuring All Channels ALL CH Input Settings Setup You can configure the settings of all channels while viewing the settings in a list You can also set all the settings for a type of item at once and copy the various vertical axis settings of one channel to another channel There are some items that cannot be configured from the ALL CH list Measurement Type Settings Voltage Waveform display color waveform display Disp label Label coupling Coupling vertical scale V Scale bandwidth limit Band Width zoom method DIV Scale offset Offset position Position magnification for zooming V Zoom display range limits for zooming Upper Lower probe attenuation and current to voltage conversion ratio Probe Voltage for the Waveform display color waveform display Disp label Label coupling Coupling vertical 16 CH Voltage Input scale V Scale bandwidth limit Band Width zoom method DIV Scale offset Offset position Module Position magnification for zooming V Zoom display range limits for Zooming Upper Lower Temperature Waveform display color waveform display Disp label Label coupling Coupling thermocouple type Type bandwidth limit Band Width display range settings Upper Lower reference junction compensation RJC burnout Burn Out Strain Waveform display color waveform display Disp label Label range unit Range
86. 2 Level at Marker3 Level at Marker4 Level difference between Marker1 and Marker2 Level difference between Marker1 and Marker3 Level difference between Marker1 and Marker4 Level difference between Marker2 and Marker3 Level difference between Marker2 and Marker4 Level difference between Marker3 and Marker4 Peak Cursors Peak The DL850 DL850V detects the waveform peaks in the range of 5 to 5 div of the frequency axis and measures their frequencies and levels Measurement Items Item Setup The following values at the peaks are measured F2 and Y2 are items that can be measured on models with the G2 option F1 Frequency at Peak1 F2 Frequency at Peak2 Y1 Level at Peak1 Y2 Level at Peak2 9 10 IM DL850 01EN 9 Cursor Measurement Notes about Cursor Measurement Cursor Measurement You cannot perform cursor measurement on snapshot waveforms or accumulated waveforms that have been acquired in the past You can perform cursor measurement on the most recent accumulated waveform For history waveforms cursor measurement is performed on the waveform whose record number is selected The measured time values are based on the trigger position The measured value for data that cannot be measured appears as The pulse rotate setting only affects the X axis horizontal cursor measurement values While the dual capture window is displayed you can perform cursor measurements on captured waveforms T
87. 30 Hz or Full P See here IM DL850 01EN 2 19 2 Vertical Axis Display Range Upper Lower To display the measured waveform on the screen you need to set upper and lower display range limits that are appropriate for the input Maximum Range e 5432 to 5432 C when the resolution is 0 1 C e 5432 to 5432 K when the resolution is 0 1 K The minimum span is 2 C or 2 K Temperature Unit Unit You can set the temperature unit to C or K The default setting is C Trace Settings Trace Setup P See here Reference Junction Compensation and Burnout Temperature Setup Reference Junction Compensation RJC The voltage produced by thermocouple is based on the temperature of the point that you are measuring and the temperature of the reference junction Reference junction compensation RJC refers to the act of correcting for the temperature of the measuring instrument and using it as a cold junction On the DL850 DL850V you can turn the internal RJC circuit on and off ON Select ON to use the RJC circuit to perform reference junction compensation OFF Select OFF to check measured temperature values or use an external reference junction 0 C Normally you should perform measurements with RJC set to ON Li When you set RJC to OFF and apply a voltage that corresponds to a temperature t to an input terminal if the measured temperature does not match temperature t the DL850 DL850V or the module may be da
88. 3EN Int The internal clock signal is used as the time base the TIME DIV time axis setting is valid Ext An external clock signal is used as the time base the TIME DIV time axis setting is invalid IM DL850 01EN 5 5 5 Waveform Acquisition Pulses per Rotation Pulse Rotate When the time base is an external clock you can specify how many pulses of the external clock signal how many sampled data acquisitions correspond to one mechanical rotation or period For example if you set Pulse Rotate to 100 pulses when the record length is 1 kpoint 10 rotations worth of sampled data will be acquired When Pulse Rotate is set to 1 pulse each point of sampled data corresponds to a single rotation The Pulse Rotate setting only affects the horizontal cursor measurement values and how the time axis is displayed on the screen For example if you set Pulse Rotate to 100 pulses when the record length is 1 kpoint 1 div will correspond to 1 rotation With these settings if you move the cursor by 1 div the measured horizontal value will only increase by 1 Selectable range for pulses 1 to 24000 Li Notes about Sampling Using an External Clock Signal You cannot acquire waveforms when the acquisition mode is set to Envelope or BoxAverage You cannot display waveforms in roll mode There is no function for dividing the frequency of the clock signal The time axis cannot be changed To change the time axis display range change th
89. 50 01EN 4 7 4 Triggering A gt B N Trigger Enhanced After state condition A is met the DL850 DL850V triggers when state condition B is met N times Met Met N times A B B B Trigger Trigger Source You can use CH1 to CH16 and Bit 1 to Bit 8 as the trigger sources Bit 1 to Bit 8 appear as options when a logic input module is installed in a slot P See here State Conditions A State B State To set state conditions A and B select the states of the trigger sources in relation to the trigger level Example State Condition State Condition A B CH1 H H CH2 L L CH3 Bit 1 L H Bit 2 H X Bit 8 X L CH4 X X CH16 X H H The signal level must be high L The signal level must be low X The signal is not used as a condition State Condition Achievement Condition A Condition B Condition Select how the result of comparing the trigger source states to their specified conditions must change for a state condition to be considered met Enter The result must change from not being met to being met Exit The result must change from being met to not being met Number of Times State Condition B Must Be Met Set the number of times that state condition B must be met Selectable range 1 to 10000 The default setting is 1 Trigger Level Level and Trigger Hysteresis Hys Set these items for each trigger source These items are
90. 850 DL850V also performs statistical processing for selected automatically measured items that are not displayed The number of measured values used to calculate statistics Count is equal to the number of waveforms that have been acquired up to that point If you add an additional automatically measured item to apply statistical processing to the number of measured values used to calculate the statistics Cnt is reset to 1 regardless of whether the DL850 DL850V is acquiring waveforms Measurement Items Measure Setup Statistical processing is performed on the same measurement items that the automated measurement of waveform parameters is performed on The following five statistics are computed for the measurement items whose measurement has been turned on The maximum number of measurement items that can be displayed on the screen is 3 Maximum Maximum value Minimum Minimum value Average Average value SDev Standard deviation Count Number of measured values used to calculate statistics The measurement items are the same as those for the automated measurement of waveform parameters P See here o If you select CH1 P P as the automatically measured item the number of measured values used to calculate the maximum minimum mean and standard deviation values for CH1 P P appear at the bottom of the Screen The DL850 DL850V can display the statistical results of three automatically measured items If four or more automa
91. 9 1 cursor types X Y waveforms sss 9 7 cycle averaging cycle frequency zi cyclic statistical processing sssseee 10 8 D data loadirig chon epe data saving herede inei ie edere data frames reading 2 data typo a ien Renee Decora dea eed data type CAN date and time settings 20 5 DC coupling setting 2 6 deceleration 2 32 defa lt settirigs itio ect Ho eren ier aes 20 1 definition file CAN sese 2 41 delay between channels 10 4 differentiation App 5 digital filter App 3 display configuring 20 8 display color s ice nur eee n a Ede e cen 6 3 display format 6 2 display group s zio ahaa ce Ea gs 6 3 display mode history sssseeeeenn 16 2 display pattem enero ien 6 1 acp m distance dot display qual Captures 124 c ect ee eri nete b na exe t dex deed 5 7 CUT RATIO 6 s rne RUM iets AE 2 29 E Page Edge On A trigger c ccceesceeceseeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeeeeeaee 4 10 edge search 5 6d eL ete edi rig HE 15 2 electromagnetic pickup sesseeeen 2 33 enhanced es 48 envelope mode e 5 2 environment settings 20 8 Ethernet communication sese 19 1 event display cc cae eee
92. DL850 01EN 1 Main Features Vertical Axis This section explains how to configure the signal input settings and the amplitude direction display settings The items that can be set vary depending on the installed modules The channel menu that corresponds to the key you pressed CH1 to CH16 appears You can set the various vertical axis settings for each channel Press ALL CH to display a screen in which you can configure the settings of all channels while viewing the settings in a list DL850 DL850V Measurement Items When the DL850 DL850V is equipped with the modules listed below it can measure voltage temperature strain acceleration frequency logic CAN bus signals and so on Voltage 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO_10M12 701260 HV with RMS 720210 HS100M12 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701265 TEMP HPV 701275 ACCL VOLT Voltage For the 16 CH Voltage Input Module 720220 16CH VOLT Temperature 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701265 TEMP HPV Strain 701270 STRAIN_NDIS 701271 STRAIN_DSUB Acceleration 701275 ACCL VOLT Frequency 701280 FREQ Logic 720230 LOGIC CAN Bus Signal Monitoring 720240 CAN MONITOR This module can only be used with the DL850V Vertical Scale The vertical scale is used to adjust the displayed waveform amplitude so that you can easily view signals You can set the vertical scale to determine the value per grid square 1 div
93. DL850 01EN App 19 Appendix Pulse Width and Duty Cycle Measurement When the input signal is less than or equal to 25 KHz measurement is made as described in 1 When the input signal is greater than or equal to 25 kHz measurement is made according to the last waveforms in the measurement intervals as described in 2 The sequence of processing described below is performed simultaneously through pipeline processing Thus the period t and frequency f are updated every 40 us 1 When the input signal is less than or equal to 25 kHz The module measures the times of occurrence of the pulse edges T1 T2 and T3 in measurement intervals A and B In measurement interval C For the pulse width The module calculates the pulse width as T2 T1 For the duty cycle The module calculates the duty cycle as T2 T1 T3 T1 A B C Measurement i 40 us 40 us I lt interval 40 US 4 H ila H gt i La Pulse width i gt t Time T1 Time T2 Time T3 Input pulse gt Pulse width T2 T1 Duty T2 TI T3 T1 2 When the input signal is greater than or equal to 25 kHz The DL850 DL850V measures the times of occurrence of the last pulse edges T1 T2 and T3 in measurement interval A In measurement interval B For the pulse width The module calculates the pulse width as T2 T1 For the duty cycle The module calculates the duty cycle as T2 T1 T3 T1 A B Measurem
94. DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder USER S MANUAL Features Guide YOKOGAWA 4 Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM DL850 01EN 2nd Edition Thank you for purchasing the DL850 ScopeCorder or DL850V ScopeCorder Vehicle Edition hereinafter DL850 DL850V will refer to both of these products This manual contains useful information about the features of the DL850 DL850V To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises The following four manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the DL850 DL850V Read them along with this manual Manual Title Manual No Description DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder IM DL850 01EN This manual The supplied CD contains the PDF file Features Guide of this manual This manual explains all the DL850 DL850V features other than the communication interface features DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder IM DL850 02bEN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual User s Manual The manual explains how to operate the DL850 DL850V DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder IM DL850 03EN The manual explains the handling precautions and Getting Started Guide basic operations of the DL850 DL850V and provides an overview of its features DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder IM DL850 17EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this Communication Interface manual The manual explains the DL850 DL850V
95. E 04 to 3 0000E 04 when USTR is selected e 1 5000E 01 to 1 5000E 01 when mV V is selected Set the limits so that the upper limit is greater than the lower limit 2 22 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Range Unit Range Unit Set the range unit uSTR Units of strain x10 strain mV V Units of strain gauge transducer output The default setting is units of strain USTR The relationship between USTR and mV V is shown in the equation below mV V 0 5 x uSTR 1000 Example 500 STR gt 0 5 x 500 uSTR 1000 0 25 mV V Aunit that corresponds to the strain gauge transducer s output It indicates the amount of transducer output in mV that corresponds to 1 V of applied bridge voltage On the DL850 DL850V the bridge voltage excitation applied bridge voltage can be set to 2 V 5 V or 10 V but the mV V values are converted and displayed so the measured values normally remain constant Trace Settings Trace Setup P See here Inverted Waveform Display Invert P See here Linear Scaling Linear Scale P See here The 701271 STRAIN DSUB supports shunt calibration O When you measure strain be sure to perform balancing Only set the bridge voltage to 5 V or 10 V when the bridge resistance is 350 O or greater The strain will not be measured properly if you apply a bridge voltage of 5 V or 10 V when the bridge resistance is 350 Q or less When you use a strain gauge transducer be sure
96. Equation 8 the General Equation 9 180 000 971 970 90 000 1 941 1 937 36 000 4 838 4 814 18 000 9 629 9 537 App 18 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Appendix 5 Measurement Principle of the Frequency Module Measurement Principle Measurement Method and Update Rate of the Frequency Module The measurement principle of the period frequency pulse width and duty cycle on the frequency module 701280 FREQ is described below Period and Frequency Measurement The frequency module updates the waveform at a rate of 25 kHz 40 us interval The measurement method differs for frequencies above 25 kHz and below 25 kHz as described below When the input signal is less than or equal to 25 kHz measurement is made as described in 1 When the input signal is greater than or equal to 25 kHz measurement is made as described in 2 The sequence of processing described below is performed simultaneously through pipeline processing Thus the period t and frequency f are updated every 40 us 1 When the input signal is less than or equal to 25 kHz The module measures the time of occurrence of the pulse edge T1 in measurement interval A The module measures the time of occurrence of the pulse edge T2 in measurement interval B The module calculates the period t in measurement interval C t T2 T1 The frequency f is calculated as 1 period t When the period of the input pulse spans over multiple measurement intervals comput
97. Isolated probe 701947 100 1 Current probe 701933 10 A 1 V Current probes 701930 701931 100 A 1 V Differential probe 700924 1000 1 100 1 10 1 passive probe 701940 10 1 The attenuation settings available on the DL850 DL850V are 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 10 A 1 V1 and 100 A 1 V2 If you use a probe other than one of the separately sold optional accessories provided by Yokogawa set the attenuation ratio in accordance with that probe 1 Output voltage rate 0 1 V A 2 Output voltage rate 0 01 V A Li Use a probe that is appropriate for the input capacitance of the module that you are using it with The capacitance cannot be adjusted for an inappropriate probe IM DL850 01EN 2 7 2 Vertical Axis Bandwidth Bandwidth You can specify a bandwidth limit for each module You can use bandwidth limits to observe input signal waveforms with their noise components removed Normal Bandwidth Limits You can remove high frequency components from the input signal The bandwidth limits vary as shown below depending on the input module Input Module 701250 HS10M12 701255 NONISO 10M12 701251 HS1M16 701260 HV with RMS 720210 HS100M12 720220 16CH VOLT 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701265 TEMP HPV 701270 STRAIN NDIS 701271 STRAIN DSUB 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701275 ACCL VOLT 701280 FREQ alaaa nanahan alha alaaa 1 When measuring temperature Bandwidt
98. K when Math1 and Math2 are set to ON ASCII CSV 4 to 5 Mpoint Float FLD Approx 1 6 M 100 kpoint 32 x 4 x the number of history waveforms x 4 Save Range Range You can select the waveform save range area from one of the choices below Main window Main Saves the data displayed in the main window Zoom 1 or Zoom2 Zoom1 or Zoom2 Saves the data displayed in the specified zoom window Cursor range Cursor Range Saves the data in the area between the cursors Save Conditions Waveform Save Setup Waveform to Save Select Save Trace You can select All ON CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN and Math The waveforms you select that are displayed are saved Even if you select All ON only the waveforms that are displayed are saved 1 You can select the channel of an installed module 2 Ifthe 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed You cannot select sub channels 3 When a CAN bus monitor module is installed You cannot select sub channels The vertical axis horizontal axis and trigger settings are also saved along with the waveforms Saving History Waveforms History You can set the source waveform to one of the waveforms below One waveform One Only the waveform with the record number specified in the history menu is saved All waveforms All All history waveforms between the start and end numbers specified in the history menu are saved To save an averaged history waveform set the display mode in the history
99. M DL850 01EN 5 Waveform Acquisition The number of data points that are averaged varies as indicated below depending on the sample rate Sample Rate S s Number of Data Points 100 M 1 point 50 M 2 points 20M 4 points out of 5 10M 8 points out of 10 5M 16 points out of 20 2M 32 points out of 50 1M 64 points out of 100 500 k 128 points out of 200 200 k 256 points out of 500 100 k or less 256 points out of the number of points equivalent to 100 M sample rate The same as Normal mode Averaging Mode Average The DL850 DL850V acquires waveforms multiple times averages the same time points relative to the trigger point saves them in the acquisition memory and uses them to display averaged waveforms Averaging mode is useful when you want to remove random noise from waveforms The averaging method varies depending on the acquisition count When Acquisition Count Is When Acquisition Count Is Set to Infinity Set to a Value between 2 and 65536 in 2 steps Exponential average Linear average N An HN 1 An 1 Xn Xn 1 An nth averaged value AN Xn nth measured value Xn nth measured value N Attenuation constant N Average count acquisition count 2 to 256 in 2 steps Li When waveforms are acquired in averaging mode they are saved to the acquisition memory as a single record This means that the history feature cannot be used You cannot select averaging mode
100. N 13 1 13 GO NO GO Determination Zone Settings When Edit is set to Whole you can set the upper lower left and right boundaries of the waveform zone When Edit is set to Part you can set the upper and lower boundaries of the zone Upper and lower boundaries Upper and Lower Selectable range 10 div vertically from the base waveform When Edit is set to Part you can set the upper and lower boundaries of the area between Time Range1 and Time Range2 Leftand right sides Left and Right These settings can only be configured when Edit is set to Whole Selectable range 5 div from the center of the screen Time range 1 and time range 2 Time Range1 and Time Range2 These settings can only be configured when Edit is set to Part Selectable range 5 div on the time axis Save Destination Store as You can select one of the following save destinations for the waveform zone Zone 1 to zone 6 Zone1 to Zone6 The save destination is changed to the selected zone number Cancel Cancel The save destination is not changed Saving a Waveform Zone Execute Store Save the waveform zone Ending Editing Quit Exit the waveform zone editor If you do not press the Execute Store soft key to save the zone that you have edited it will be lost Judgment Conditions Judgement Setup For each of 16 judgment conditions you can set the source waveform zone number and judgment criterion You can also set the judgment logic acti
101. Name File Name and Comment Comment You can set file names and comments You can also use the auto naming feature to automatically assign file names P See here File Division Data File Divide You can specify the number of files that the recorded data is divided into You can use this feature to avoid creating large files that take time to process You can specify the number of divisions but the actual number of files that will actually be saved is a number close to the specified number 5 4 IM DL850 01EN 5 Waveform Acquisition Li Before you turn on the DL850 DL850V connect the external hard disk to the DL850 DL850V and turn on the external hard disk If you connect a hard disk or turn it on after you turn on the DL850 DL850V the hard disk will not be detected Also when the external hard disk is on do not disconnect its cable Hard disk recording cannot be performed when the record length is less than 1 Mpoint Hard disk recording cannot be performed when the acquisition trigger is on or when the dual capture feature is being used Hard disk recording can only be performed when the trigger mode is set to On Start It cannot be performed in other modes When hard disk recording is enabled you cannot use an external clock as the time base When you start hard disk recording cursor measurement and the automated measurement of waveform parameters stop During hard disk recording only starting and stop
102. ON The DL850 DL850V prints using the same colors as the screen excluding the background color The grid and some other items are printed in black OFF The DL850 DL850V prints in the same way that it prints from the built in printer Comment Comment You can enter a comment of up to 26 characters in length The comment that you create is displayed in the bottom of the screen Changing this comment also changes the built in printer and file comments IM DL850 01EN 17 1 17 Printing and Saving Screen Captures Saving Screen Captures to Files File You can save screen captures to files in PNG BMP and JPEG formats Data Format Format You can select the format to save to from the options listed below PNG The extension is PNG The file size is approximately 50 KB for black and white mode and approximately 100 KB for color mode BMP The extension is BMP The file size is approximately 150 KB for black and white mode and approximately 2 MB for color mode JPEG The extension is JPG The file size is approximately 250 KB for color mode Li The file sizes listed here are for reference Actual file sizes will vary depending on the image that is saved Color Color You can select the color format to save to from the options below ON Saves data using 65536 colors ON Gray Saves data using 16 grayscale levels ON Reverse Saves data using 65536 colors The image background is set to white OFF
103. RACE ssesesssseeseseneen nennt entere ennt en nnns ene nter e snnt enne nter 20 2 Remote Control Remote Ctrl 4 oes i erede e td te eterne dene dedos 20 3 System Configuration System Configuration em 20 5 Environment Settings Preference ssssssseeeene nennen mener 20 8 Self Test Selftest orti e EL peek phos ae ex EcL Fa EE rag Eb iw Tte cR qe EATER pee 20 9 Overview OVerview tied tte retenti teret aaa deducted taceo Dea Ede ede dene tede s 20 10 Key Lock KEY PROTECT iiti neatis Encore e tete bc Pe eie dante 20 10 NUM EOGCI tte nee niit de s M E Ant 20 10 Appendix Appendix 1 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform sssssssssssssseenee App 1 Appendix 2 User Defined Computation Optional see App 3 FFT Function user defined c ccccceecesccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeneaeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeseeanaeeeeees App 7 Appendix 3 Fundamental Equations for Defining Strain ee eeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeaes App 12 Appendix 4 Shunt Calibration of the Strain Module ss App 13 Shunt Calibration Procedure ssseeseeeeene emen App 14 Appendix 5 Measurement Principle of the Frequency Module eese App 19 Appendix 6 List of Preset Settings of the Frequency Module n se App 23 Appendix 7 TCP and UDP Port Numbers sssessseeeenene eme enne App 26 Index vi IM
104. Specified date and time v v Trigger Trigger Trigger b Time interval sl 0 Depending on the specified time interval a trigger may occur while the waveform is being acquired or in the pre trigger section the section before the trigger that is acquired for observation When this happens the trigger is ignored Ifthe specified date and time fall within the pre trigger section a trigger occurs at the end of the pre trigger section Ifthe specified date and time are in the past triggers occur at the points in the present defined by the function specified date and time time interval x integer N f you set the number of acquisitions the specified number of waveforms are acquired When the specified number of acquisitions is infinite waveform acquisition continues until you press START STOP IM DL850 01EN 4 3 4 Triggering External Signal External Select External to use the signal that is received through the left panel TRIG IN input terminal as the trigger source Power Line Signal Line Select Line to use the power line signal received by the DL850 DL850V as the trigger source The DL850 DL850V only triggers on the rising edge This option enables you to observe waveforms in synchronization with the power supply frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Trigger Level Level Trigger level refers to the signal level used as a reference for detecting a signal s rising and falling edges or high and low stat
105. Turn passive FTP on or off In passive mode the FTP client sets the port number for data transfer Enable passive mode when you have set an external FTP server as a network drive or when you are accessing an FTP server through a firewall Timeout Time Out If the DL850 DL850V cannot transfer files for a certain amount of time it disconnects from the FTP server Connecting to the Network Drive Connect Disconnect When you press the Connect button the DL850 DL850V connects to the specified network drive and the drive appears in the file list File List When you press the disconnect button the network drive is disconnected and removed from the file list File List 19 6 IM DL850 01EN 19 Ethernet Communication Optional SNTP SNTP The DL850 DL850V clock can be set using Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP The DL850 DL850V can be configured to automatically adjust its clock when it is turned on SNTP Server SNTP Server Specify the IP address of the SNTP server that the DL850 DL850V will use In a network with a DNS server you can specify the host name and domain name instead of the IP address Timeout Timeout If the DL850 DL850V cannot connect to the SNTP server for a certain amount of time it aborts the operation Executing Time Adjustment Adjust The DL850 DL850V clock is synchronized to the SNTP server clock Automatic Adjustment Adjust at Power On You can configure the DL850 DL850V so that its clock is autom
106. Unit measurement range Range bandwidth limit Band Width display range settings Upper Lower gauge factor Gauge Factor bridge voltage Excitation Acceleration Waveform display color waveform display Disp label Label coupling Coupling gain Gain bandwidth limit Band Width zoom method DIV Scale position Position magnification for zooming V Zoom display range limits for zooming Upper Lower sensitivity Sensitivity Frequency Waveform display color waveform display Disp label Label measured item Function vertical scale V Scale zoom method DIV Scale offset Offset position Position magnification for zooming V Zoom display range limits for zooming Upper Lower center frequency CenterFreq input settings Input Logic Waveform display color waveform display Disp label Label bit display Bit Display chattering elimination Chatter Elim position Position magnification for zooming V Zoom bit mapping Mapping n the menu for configuring all channels for channels that correspond to CAN bus monitor modules you can only set the Display setting which determines whether waveforms are displayed Linear Scaling Linear Scale You can configure the linear scaling settings of all channels while viewing the settings in a list The settings that you can view and configure are listed below This function is the same as the linear scaling function for voltage measurement
107. V x20 V 50 V 100 V 200 V 500 V FS Input Coupling Coupling You can set the input coupling to DC or AC P See here Probe Type Probe You can set the probe type to 1 1 or 1 10 P See here Bandwidth Bandwidth You can set the bandwidth limit to 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz or Full You cannot select Full when Preset is set to AC100V or AC200V P See here Threshold Level Threshold You can set the level within the FS of the input voltage range The resolution is the value that corresponds to 196 of the FS Hysteresis Hysteresis You can set the hysteresis to 196 2 5 or 5 of the FS of the input voltage range Slope Slope Select 4 rising or 1 falling Chattering Elimination Chatter Elimination Eliminates the chattering that occurs in cases such as when the contact input is turned on or off The changes in the signal over the specified time can be discarded You can set the interval to a value from O to 1000 ms in 1 ms steps When 0 ms is selected chattering elimination is turned off Chattering elimination works on both rising and falling edges 2 34 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Pull Up Pull Up You can only choose whether to enable the pull up function when Preset is set to Pull up 5V You cannot configure the pull up setting when another preset is selected If you enable the pull up function set the input voltage to a value from O V to 5 V If you apply a voltage that is ou
108. Y axes have different sample rates An X Y waveform cannot be displayed if it is a combination of a sub channel on the 16 CH Voltage Input Module and a normal channel You can display an X Y waveform of two sub channels that have the same sample rate The same limitation that applies to the 16 CH Voltage Input Module also applies to CAN bus monitor modules An X Y waveform can be displayed if it is a combination of a sub channel on the 16 CH Voltage Input Module and a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module and if the two sub channels have the same sample rate X Y waveforms can be created from normal T Y waveforms They cannot be created from zoomed waveforms Logic waveforms and event waveforms cannot be used to make X Y waveforms You cannot create an X Y waveform using one trace whose horizontal axis unit is time and another trace whose horizontal axis unit is frequency Start Point and End Point Start Point and End Point You can set the start and end points of the X Y waveforms on the T Y waveforms You can set different start and end points for each X Y window Selectable range 5 div from the center of the T Y waveform window Pen Marker Pen Marker You can display a pen marker on an X Y waveform whose display is turned on It shows the current sampled point of the waveform IM DL850 01EN 7 1 7 Displaying X Y Waveforms Clearing Waveforms at Acquisition Start Trace clear on Start Choose whether to clear the
109. a file in CSV format The extension is CSV CSV files are text files that contain data separated by commas They are used to convert data between spreadsheet and database applications The maximum number of previous values that you can save is equal to 100000 number of items that are turned on Data size in bytes Number of measured items x 15 x number of history waveforms Saving Execute Save Saves the data to the specified save destination with the specified file name 18 6 IM DL850 01EN 18 Saving and Loading Data Loading Data Load You can load waveform data setup data and snapshot waveforms that have been saved by the DL850 DL850V Loading Waveform Data Waveform Waveform data in binary format files with WDF extensions can be loaded You can load a specified waveform data file with the setup data You can load the entirety of the specified waveform data file Waveforms of computed data appear when computation is turned on Because setup data is also loaded the DL850 DL850V settings change when you load waveform data If you start waveform acquisition by pressing the START STOP key the loaded data is cleared Li fthe modules that are currently installed in the DL850 DL850V are different from the modules that were installed when the waveform data was saved you cannot load the waveform data for the modules that are different f you load waveform data saved by a module with a larger amount of memory on
110. a module with a smaller amount of memory the number of history waveforms acquisition conditions number of channels and other settings are adjusted to match the condition of the module with the smaller amount of memory You can only load waveform data that you saved with the save range set to the main window Loading Setup Data Setup The setup data of the specified file is loaded The extension is SET Recalling Data from the Internal Memory You can recall setup data from the internal memory from the save load menu P See here 0 If the modules that are currently installed in the DL850 DL850V are different from the modules that were installed when the setup data was saved you cannot load the setup data for the modules that are different Loading Other Types of Data Others The snapshot waveforms of the specified file or the contents of a symbol definition file are loaded Snapshot Waveforms Snap The snapshot waveforms that you load are displayed in white on the screen The extension is SNP Symbol Definition Files Symbol CAN data definition files whose extensions are SBL P See here Loading Execute Load Loads the data of the specified file IM DL850 01EN 18 7 18 Saving and Loading Data File Operations Utility You can perform file operations such as creating folders on the storage medium deleting and copying files and changing file names Sorting the List Sort To You can sort the file list b
111. able range Up to 2x10 counts N count 4 IM DL850 01EN 2 29 2 Vertical Axis Velocity Velocity Velocity km h distance per pulse km Tw s x 3600 Velocity m s distance per pulse m Tw s You can define unique distances and units angular velocity and other units Measurable range F 1 Tw 0 01 Hz to 200 kHz ais Distance per pulse I Settings for Each Item When Measuring Revolutions Pulse Rotation Setting Pulse Rotate Set the number of pulses per revolution to a value from 1 to 99999 When Measuring Duty Ratios or Pulse Widths Measured Pulse Setting Measure Pulse Set the type of pulse to measure to Positive or Negative When Measuring Duty Ratios Positive The rising pulse percentage is measured Negative The falling pulse percentage is measured When Measuring Pulse Widths Positive The rising pulse width is measured Negative The falling pulse width is measured When Positive Is Selected When Negative Is Selected Tp Tp Pulse width The width of Tp is measured Ta Ta 3 pers Duty Tb Tb Ta Tb is measured Notes about Duty Ratio Measurement During duty ratio measurement the output changes to 096 or 10096 when one of the following conditions is met Apulse is not received for a period of time equal to four times the period of the previous pulse T Apulse is not received for 20 seconds When Measure Pulse is set to Positive if o
112. ain gauge The strain module 701271 STRAIN DSUB supports shunt calibration with a built in shunt calibration relay circuit To perform shunt calibration you need a bridgehead that supports shunt calibration the 701957 or 701958 When correcting the gain on the negative side normal Shunt calibration relay circuit Built into the strain module Turns on and off automatically when shunt calibration is executed Shunt resistor connected to the bridgehead Bridge Bridge voltage Bridge When correcting the gain on the positive side Shunt calibration relay circuit Built into the strain module Turns on and off automatically when shunt calibration is executed Shunt resistor when correcting the positive side Bridge Bridge voltage Bridge On the DL850 DL850V in addition to performing normal shunt calibration when the shunt calibration relay circuit is on you can also set the zero point value when the relay circuit is off The zero point value is valid when the strain value after balancing is performed is not 0 Linear Scaling Modes Scaling Mode Shunt Select this mode to perform shunt calibration The other linear scaling modes are the same as those listed for voltage measurement P See here 2 24 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis e PT X When Shunt Cal Exec is performed the input value when the relay circuit is off is applied P1 Y Set the value for when the r
113. al or horizontal axes ON Displays the scale values OFF Does not display the scale values Waveform Arrangement Color and Display Gr Trace Setup You can set the following items for the input channels CH1 to CH16 of the modules installed in the slots and for the computation channels Math1 to Math8 You cannot configure settings for input modules that are not installed Allocation Mode Allocation Mode Select which channels to display in which window divisions zones Auto The waveforms whose displays are turned on are arranged by number from the top of the window User The waveforms are arranged according to the settings configured for Zone Moving Input Channels CH You can move input and computation channels To move a channel remove it from the list and then select it in the location that you want to move it to Display Color Color You can set the display color of each of the waveforms to one of 16 colors You can assign all waveforms regardless of whether their displays are turned on You can set the colors of each of the sub channels on the 16ch Voltage input and CAN bus monitor modules Because logic input modules are not displayed as individual bits but are instead displayed as single channels a logic input channel can only have one color assigned to it Zone Zone When Allocation Mode is set to User you can specify which division of the screen zone to display each of the waveforms in You c
114. alue corresponding to the shunt resistor to P2 Y Obtained automatically when shunt calibration is performed App 14 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Shunt Calibration Execution Menu The shunt calibration execution menu appears when you select Linear Scale Mode and then Shunt in the CH menu In normal shunt calibration only P2 Y is set On the DL850 DL850V in addition to performing normal shunt calibration when the shunt calibration relay circuit is on you can also set the zero point value when the relay circuit is off The zero point value is valid when the strain value after balancing is performed is not O Items in the Execution Menu 1 P1 X When shunt calibration is executed the input value when the relay circuit is off is applied 2 P1 Y Set the value for when the relay circuit is off normally 0 3 P2 X When shunt calibration is executed the input value when the relay circuit is on is applied 4 P2 Y Set the strain value that corresponds to the shunt resistance when the relay circuit is on Linear Scale Scaling Scaling Mode OFF AX B P1 P2 PAIX 1 0000 Pity 0 0000 PAX 5 000 pay 10000 Shunt Cal Exec Unit String Li When you execute shunt calibration select an appropriate range so that the measured values will stay within the range when the shunt calibration relay circuit is on The DL850 DL850V attempts to perform shunt calibration within the current range
115. amount of time elapses the DL850 DL850V triggers when the state condition B is first met Edge On A trigger While state condition A is met the DL850 DL850V triggers on the OR of multiple trigger source edges OR trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers on the OR of multiple trigger source edges AND trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers on the AND of multiple trigger source conditions Period trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers on a specified period of occurrence of state condition B Pulse Width trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers after state condition B has been met for a specified duration width Wave Window trigger The DL850 DL850V creates real time templates Wave Window using a number of cycles directly preceding the current waveforms The DL850 DL850V compares the current waveforms to the real time templates and triggers if one of the current waveforms falls outside of its real time template A state condition is a condition that is met when the levels of specified trigger sources are High or Low relative to a specified trigger level If you set a signal to X Don t Care the state of the specified signal is not used to determine whether the state condition is met Manual Trigger Manual Trigger Regardless of the trigger settings you can make the DL850 DL850V trigger by pressing the MANUAL TRIG key on the front panel Signal Type and Trigger Type Combinations The signal type analog or logic determines what trigger types you can use
116. an FFT fast Fourier transform on the waveform assigned to Source and displays a power spectrum You can use this function to view the frequency distribution of an input signal Computation Source Waveform Source Unit Unit Label Label and Turning the Display On and Off Display These settings are the same as those for basic arithmetic P See here FFT Settings FFT Setup Select the data points and window function to use for the FFT Number of FFT Points FFT Points You can set the number of points from the start of computation on the T Y waveform to one of the options below 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k 50k or 100k Window Function Window You can select the window function from the following options Rect Hanning Flat Top Hamming P See here Phase Shift Shift S1 You can shift the phase of the waveform assigned to Source display the resulting waveform and use the phase shifted data in computations Computation Source Waveform Source Unit Unit Label Label and Turning the Display On and Off Display These settings are the same as those for basic arithmetic P See here Shift Shift You can shift waveforms within the following ranges Whenan Internal Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base Selectable range The time values between record length 2 points to record length 2 points Step 1 sample rate The sample rate varies depending on how the record length and Time div settings are configured Fo
117. an assign all waveforms regardless of whether their displays are turned on You can assign zones to each of the sub channels on the 16ch Voltage input and CAN bus monitor modules Because logic input modules are not displayed as individual bits but are instead displayed as single channels a logic input module can only be assigned to one zone Display Groups Select Display Gr When modules such as 16 CH Voltage Input Modules that have multiple channels sub channels are installed you can divide the channels into groups and display them You can divide the channels into up to four groups You can assign the same channel to multiple groups You cannot assign the following channels to separate groups The bits of a single logic input module Trace Label Display Trace Label You can display waveform labels next to the displayed waveforms If the waveform display is narrow because of the display format settings labels may not be displayed ON Displays labels OFF Does not display labels IM DL850 01EN 6 3 6 Display Level Indicator A level indicator that shows the levels of the waveforms whose displays are turned on appears on the right side of the waveform display area It shows the current levels of the sampled data Interpolation Method Dot Connect When the number of data points is within the interpolation zone of the T Y waveform display the DL850 DL850V displays waveforms by interpolating between sampled data po
118. assigned to Source2 from the waveform assigned to Source1 S1 S2 Multiplies the waveforms assigned to Source1 and Source2 S1 S2 Divides the waveform assigned to Source1 by waveform assigned to Source2 Bin S1 Converts the waveform assigned to Source to binary PS S1 Computes the power spectrum of the waveform assigned to Source Shift S1 Shows the waveform assigned to Source with its phase shifted User Define Performs user defined computation G2 option IM DL850 01EN 11 1 11 Computation Basic Arithmetic S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 and 1 S2 Performs addition subtraction multiplication or division on the two waveforms assigned to Source1 and Source2 computed computed x computed waveform waveform waveform Computation source KA S waveforms PAS EA Computed waveform Computation Source Waveforms Source or Source1 and Source2 CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math74 1 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it 4 You can use other computed waveforms as computation source waveforms If the waveform that you are configuring is MathX you can use a computation waveform up to Ma
119. atically synchronized to the SNTP server clock when the DL850 DL850V is turned on when it is connected to the network Li If the time difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time is set in the date time setting the DL850 DL850V will make appropriate adjustments to the time information received from the SNTP server P See here f you do not want the DL850 DL850V to synchronize with an SNTP server do not set the SNTP server IP address IM DL850 01EN 19 7 20 Other Features Auto Setup Auto Setup The auto setup feature automatically sets the SCALE vertical axis TIME DIV horizontal axis trigger level and other settings to values that are most suitable for the input signals This feature is useful when you are not sure what type of signal will be applied to the DL850 DL850V The auto setup feature will not work properly on some input signals There are some modules with which the auto setup feature cannot be used Center Position after the Execution of Auto Setup The center position after you execute auto setup will be 0 V Modules That Support Auto Setup 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO_10M12 701260 HV with RMS 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701275 ACCL VOLT 720210 HS100M12 720220 16CH VOLT Source Channels The DL850 DL850V executes auto setup based on the signals of all channels excluding logic channels Waveforms Displayed before the Execution of Auto Setup Waveforms that
120. ation is performed in the measurement interval following the interval in which the edge is detected A B 03 Measurement interval 40 us 40 us 40 us lt gt ja gt Period t Time T1 Time T2 Input pulse gt Period t T2 T1 Frequency f 1 period t 2 When the input signal is greater than or equal to 25 kHz The module measures the time of occurrence of the last pulse edge Te1 in measurement interval A The module measures the time of occurrence of the last pulse edge Te2 in measurement interval B The module measures the number of pulses between the last pulse edge in measurement interval A and the last pulse edge in measurement interval B The module calculates the period t in measurement interval C t Te2 Te1 number of pulses The period t calculated is the average value of multiple pulses The frequency f is calculated as 1 period t If the input pulse period is short the DL850 DL850V automatically takes the average of multiple pulses and calculates the period and frequency Therefore the resolution does not degrade even when the input pulse period is short and highly accurate measurement is possible A B C Measurement interval 40 us I lt 40 us 40 us a gt Number of pulses 3 Time Te2 Time Te1 Input pulse v gt Period t Te2 Te1 3 Frequency f 1 period t 1 1 1 1 a 1 k IM
121. base files Both the standard and extended formats are supported In addition you can output single data frames or remote frames to a CAN bus at a specific time one shot output For CAN bus signal monitoring using a CAN bus monitor module the items that have to be set include port settings data extraction conditions the sub channel display range the unit of measurement trace settings and scaling Li Youcan install up to two CAN bus monitor modules CAN MONITOR CAN bus monitor modules can only be installed in slots 7 and 8 The DL850V requires the following processing times to read data frames transferred on the CAN bus New data frames that the DL850V receives during these processing times may be discarded Number of Channels Used per Port One Port in Operation Two Ports in Operation _ 1 40 us 80 us 8 60 us 120 us 16 80 us 160 us Waveform Display Display You can select whether to display each port s input signal waveforms Each port corresponds to one of the CH13 to CH16 keys ON Displays the waveform OFF Does not display the waveform Reading Data Frames Port Configuration Port Settings Port Setup e Bit Rate Bit Rate Select the CAN bus signal transmission speed from one of the options below 10k 20k 33 3k 50k 62 5k 83 3k 125k 250k 500k 800k 1Mbps Sample Point Sample Point Select the sample point for each bit from one of the options below 7196 78 85 Resynchroni
122. be shorter than the reference time Time T Time Period T must be longer than the reference time Time T1 T T2 Period T must longer than reference time T1 and shorter than reference time T2 T T1 T2 T Period T must be shorter than reference time T1 or longer than reference time T2 Reference Times Time T1 T2 You can set the reference times Time T1 and T2 within the following ranges Setting Selectable Range Default Resolution Time 0 02 us to 10000000 00 us 10 s 0 02 us T1 0 02 us to 9999999 99 us 0 02 us 0 01 us T2 0 03 us to 10000000 00 us 10 s 0 03 us Trigger Level Level and Trigger Hysteresis Hys Set these items for each trigger source These items are the same as the trigger level gt See here and hysteresis f See here of the simple trigger Trigger Hold Off Hold Off Trigger Position Position Trigger Delay Delay These items are the same as trigger hold off J See here trigger position J See here and trigger delay P See here of the simple trigger IM DL850 01EN 4 13 4 Triggering Pulse Width Trigger Enhanced The DL850 DL850V triggers according to a specified duration achievement time for which state condition B has been met The timing of the triggering varies depending on the determination mode Y Achievement time B gt Trigger Trigger Source You can use CH1 to CH16 and Bit 1 to Bit 8 as the trigger sources Bit 1 to Bit 8 app
123. caling method and display range settings of the specified sub channel Labels Label P See here Scaling Scale Auto The upper and lower display range limits are set automatically Default To the greatest extent possible within the settable range the maximum and minimum values are used to set the display range setting which is explained below of the specified sub channel Display Range Upper Lower Specify the upper and lower limits of the waveform display range Selectable range 30 000E 30 to 30 000E 30 One Shot Output One shot out A single specified data frame or remote frame is output at the specified time Message Format Select the message format STD Standard format XTD Extended format ID Set the message ID of the output data frame Standard format 0 to 7FFH 11 bits Extended format 0 to 1FFFFFFFH 29 bits DLC Set the byte size of the data area of the data frame Selectable range 1 to 8 Data Hex In hexadecimal notation specify the data frame value to output IM DL850 01EN 2 41 2 Vertical Axis One shot out Output the data 0 You cannot output the data when in the Port Setup menu Listen Only is set to ON Trace Settings Trace Setup P See here Configuring the Scales of All Sub Channels All SubChannel Scale Configure the scales of all sub channels All SubChannel Auto The upper and lower display range limits are set automatically All SubChannel Default To the grea
124. can turn protection on and off for the selected file The change is reflected in the file attributes displayed under the Attr column in the file list Protection File Attribute Description ON r File protection is on for the selected file The file can only be read The file cannot be written to or deleted OFF r w File protection is off for the selected file The file can be read and written to File Property File Property You can view information about the selected file such as its name File Name file size File Size the date and time when it was saved Date Time and its attributes Attribute Selecting Files ALL SET ALL RESET and SET RESET Selects or deselects all the files in the list You can also only select or deselect the highlighted files 18 8 IM DL850 01EN 18 Saving and Loading Data Li To format the storage medium press the UTILITY key to display the System Config menu and then select Storage Manager P See here IM DL850 01EN 18 9 19 Ethernet Communication Network You can configure TCP IP parameters and use the optional Ethernet interface to perform the following tasks 0 To use this feature set the communication interface to Network from the UTILITY menu select Remote Ctrl gt Device gt Network TCP IP TCP IP settings for connecting to an Ethernet network Set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway P See here FTP Server FTP Web Server Y
125. cation features that are used when you connect the DL850 DL850V to a PC through USB TMC You can use USB TMC Test and Measurement Class to control the DL850 DL850V from a PC To remotely control the DL850 DL850V using communication commands through the USB port select USBTMC and then carry out the following procedure Install YOKOGAWA USB TMC driver on your PC Donotuse USB TMC drivers or software supplied by other companies Storage The connected PC can use the DL850 DL850V as a USB storage device There is no need to install the USB TMC driver into your PC Li For information about how to obtain the YOKOGAWA USB TMC driver contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer You can also access the YOKOGAWA USB driver download webpage and download the driver http tmi yokogawa com service support downloads When USB Function is set to Storage only the internal hard disk of the DL850 DL850V can be used as a storage device You cannot access the storage media connected to the USB ports of the DL850 DL850V When you access the internal hard disk of the DL850 DL850V from a PC only perform read write and delete operations Otherwise the DL850 DL850V may be damaged When USB Function is set to Storage and files are being accessed do not remove the USB cable or turn off the DL850 DL850V Doing so may damage the DL850 DL850V IM DL850 01EN 20 7 20 Other Features Environment Settings Preference Action Performed
126. changed offset will be applied to the next measurement When you are measuring voltage if you change the probe attenuation the offset voltage is determined using the new attenuation ratio When you are measuring voltage the offset will not change even if you change the voltage scale However if the offset goes outside the selectable range the offset is set to the maximum or minimum value for the current voltage scale If you set the vertical scale back to its original value without changing the offset the offset returns to its original value Li The offset does not affect cursor measurement values automated measurement values of waveform parameters or computed values You can change the position of the waveform relative to the vertical position change the focus of the vertical zoom by changing the offset IM DL850 01EN 2 11 2 Vertical Axis Trace Settings Trace Setup These settings are the same as the display assignment and display color settings in the DISPLAY menu P See here Inverted Waveform Display Invert When measuring voltage and strain you can invert the waveform display around the vertical position Normal display Inverted display Vertical position mark 4 gt ttt toto o Cursor measurements automated measurements of waveform parameters and computations are performed on
127. channel key from CH1 to CH15 and then press the soft key that corresponds to the sub channel Position 3 div Position 0 div z Position 3 div Vertical position mark o You cannot use the vertical POSITION knob to move the vertical position of a temperature strain or computed waveform When the menu for configuring all channels ALL CH or all sub channels ALL Sub Channels Setup is displayed you can use the job shuttle to change the vertical positions When you change the vertical position offset voltage or upper or lower limit when Variable is set to ON data that is outside of the measurement range is handled as overflow data As shown in the figure below waveforms appear cut off when there is overflow data n IM DL850 01EN 2 5 2 Vertical Axis Input Coupling Coupling It is easier to measure the amplitude of an AC signal if you remove its DC component On the other hand there are times when you want to measure the ground level or observe the entire signal including both the DC and AC components In these kinds of situations you can change the input coupling setting By changing the setting you can choose how the vertical axis voltage axis control circuit is coupled to the input signal You can set the input coupling to one of the options listed below
128. ctrum of the other signal Gx If the linear spectrums of the two signals are represented by Gx Rx jlx Gy Ry jly then the cross spectrum Gyx is Gyx Gy x Gx Ry jly Rx jlx Ryx jlyx where Ryx RyRx lylx lyx Rxly Rylx The DL850 DL850V can determine the following spectrums Item Expression Computation Real part CS REAL Ryx 2 Imaginary part CS IMAG lyx 2 Magnitude CS MAG A Ryx lyx2 2 Log magnitude CS LOGMAG 10 x log y Ryx lyx 2 Phase CS PHASE tan Iyx Ryx Transfer Function The transfer function expresses the frequency responses of the input to and the output from the transfer system The transfer function is determined by the ratio of the output linear spectrum Gy and the input spectrum Gx at each frequency Also as can be seen from the following equation the transfer function can be defined as the ratio of the cross spectrum of the input and output Gyx and the input power spectrum Gxx Transfer function Gy Gx Gy x Gx Gx x Gx Gyx Gxx Ryx jlyx Rx2 Ix2 The DL850 DL850V can determine the following items Item Expression Computation Real part TF REAL Ryx Rx Ix Imaginary part TF IMAG lyx Rx bx Magnitude TF MAG Ryx lyx Rx2 1x2 Log magnitude TF LOGMAG 20 x logy Ryx lyx Rx Ix Phase TF PHASE tan Iyx Ryx The magnitude of the transfer function shows the ratio of the magnitudes of the output linear spectrum and the in
129. d 12 1 statistical processing sssssseeeen 10 7 stop prediction 2 32 storage media 18 1 storage media formatting 20 6 rj c 20 2 strain fundamental equations for defining App 12 strain balancing e strain measurement 2 21 sync channel enne 4 16 system configuration 20 5 T Page T Y waveform display window esses 6 1 TG co pling selttirig 42 5 rt e ee eee 2 6 TEPIP Sui er aee aed inate tnd 19 2 TCP and UDP port numbers sssseseees App 26 temperature measurement cccceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeneees 2 19 temperature unit n terminal Setup eae ERU terminator CAN nennen 2 39 thermocouple type 2 19 time axis setting a 3 4 time base 5 5 time reference point essent 4 6 time SOANCH EI 15 5 time synchronization feature 20 6 time uhit herr tee 2 31 trace label 6 3 trademarks eoo er cre d di dextra OR de ad dedere Peg i transfer function ertet tenerte Een App 9 trigger delay trigger hold off scien aaa ce cen 4 5 trigger hysteresis eesessessssssseseeeeeeeenneennn nene 4 5 trigger leyel 2 ccce rene nt dt ate ee cxi Altace trigger mode eere eerte ei gar ERR trigger position is trigger Slope ici irte e eren trigger Sourcen 55 eec ete ro eek trigger types o eec de Hexe et
130. d is a continuous signal consider the above characteristics in selecting the proper window to be applied Time windows Integral Power spectrum Rectangular f EE i anf V Hanning MET f Sine wave TY Flattop ee ane FT dih N penes Rectangular W t u t u t T u t Step function Hanning W t 0 5 0 5 cos 2i Wit 0 54 ty sinf2n 1 2vT Flattop W t 0 54 0 46 cos a y 2n 1 2UT Hamming W t 0 54 0 46 cos 21 The exponential window is used to eliminate noise components from the signal It is suited for the signals of impulse excitation frequency response tests and other similar signals On the DL850 DL850V the exponential window and force window are activated simultaneously Exponential Window The damping rate is set in terms of the weight of the last data point with the weight of the first data point in the specified number of FFT points taken to be 100 1 You can set the damping rate in the range of 1 to 100 1 resolution The exponential window damps the signal exponentially along the time axis It is effective when the signal does not attenuate fully within the record length When the damping rate is set to 100 the window functions like a rectangular window Force Window Set the area over which computation is performed in terms of a percentage from the first FFT point taking the set number of FFT points to be
131. d trademarks of their respective companies Revisions 1st Edition June 2010 2nd Edition September 2010 2nd Edition September 2010 YK All Rights Reserved Copyright 2010 Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM DL850 01EN i Contents Main Features Vertical AXIS ii E Q 1 1 Horizontal Axis Time AXIS onnie eiaei iae aaiae eat tbe eee 1 2 Tigger rene elie Ana es ee ee ie Ae eee 1 3 Wavetorm Acqulsitlor 3 2 torte teil oh sada cheated e e detect o eee tte teed alee Ag al oh RE uM UE Ren 1 4 Wavetornt DISplay rene rt RH ERRARE RTEEE RAE ERR ter Enn HERFET ERA ER en 1 6 Waveform Computation and Analysis esssseeseeeeeen eee enne 1 6 Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module emm 1 8 Vertical Axis Input Settings J 2 rere eb tT ert i E rn e Pt 2 1 Voltage Measurement ce merianae eaa tetestI te oh apie chi quete Stan ee eee Poor ce oe edic evened enh 2 2 Vertical Scale SCALE knob dee De e itecto e Eta Genet d eot tides 2 3 Waveform Vertical Position Vertical POSITION knob eeeeeen enn 2 5 Input Coupling Coupling 2 nre otn ttr ir top te eoim a ptis etae a da kei Une 2 6 Probe Attenuation and Current to Voltage Conversion Ratio Probe secese 2 7 Bandwidth Bandwidth sissien a to ecclefia eget tera ted b defe ute dang 2 8 Zoom Method V Scale iie ete repe eee ab Ede at 2 9 Gu TESI P
132. display window to be 0 div you can move the cursors within the range of 5 to 5 div in 0 01 div steps Measurement Items Item Setup You can measure the following horizontal X axis and vertical Y axis values at the cursor positions Horizontal Axis X axis x1 Horizontal X axis value at V Cursor1 X2 Horizontal X axis value at V Cursor2 AX Difference between the horizontal X axis values of V Cursor1 and V Cursor2 Vertical Axis Y axis Y1 Vertical Y axis value at H Cursor1 Y2 Vertical Y axis value at H Cursor2 AY Difference between the vertical Y axis values of H Cursor1 and H Cursor2 Marker Cursors Marker Four markers are displayed on the selected waveform You can measure the level at each marker the amount of time from the trigger position to each marker and the level and time differences between markers Markers Marker1 through 4 Select the markers from Marker1 to 4 that you want to display You can assign each marker to a different waveform Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below XY1 to XY8 9 8 IM DL850 01EN 9 Cursor Measurement Position Position Set the position of the selected marker Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the markers within the range of 5 to 5 div in steps of the following size Time div x 10 display record length Marker Shape Marker Form Set the s
133. dule is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel 4 Cursor measurement is performed on all channels However measured values that do not fit on the screen are not displayed Moving the Cursors Cursor1 Cursor2 Use Cursor1 and Cursor2 to move the cursors Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the cursors within the range of 5 to 5 div in steps of the following size Time div x 10 display record length Measurement Items Item Setup You can measure the following horizontal values at the cursor positions x1 Time value at Cursor1 X2 Time value at Cursor2 AX Difference between the time values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 1 AX Reciprocal of the difference between the time values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Y1 Vertical value at the intersection of Cursor1 and the waveform Y2 Vertical value at the intersection of Cursor2 and the waveform AY Difference between the vertical values at the intersections of the waveform with Cursor1 and Cursor22 1 When Trace is set to All the values for the channels of all installed modules the sub channels and the Math channel are measured 2 This option does not appear when Trace is set to All 9 2 IM DL850 01EN 9 Cursor Measurement Example of Logic Signal Measurement When you measure logic waveforms using vertical cursors the measured values of Y1 and Y2 are determined in the manner shown below When No Bits Are Turned Off ON Oah
134. e URL on the right http www worldtimeserver com Li The DL850 DL850V does not support Daylight Savings Time To set the Daylight Savings Time reset the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time Date and time settings are backed up using the internal lithium battery They are retained even if the power is turned off The DL850 DL850V has leap year information IM DL850 01EN 20 5 20 Other Features Time Synchronization Feature Time Synchro optional You can use this feature to use an IRIG Inter Range Instrumentation Group signal to synchronize the time on the DL850 DL850V with the GPS Global Positioning System This feature has three conditions Unlock Lock and Stable When an IRIG signal is properly received the DL850 DL850V enters into the Lock condition and acquires time information Turning the Time Synchronization Feature On and Off Time Synchro You can select whether to use an IRIG Inter Range Instrumentation Group signal for time synchronization IRIG Code Format IRIG Format You can set the IRIG code format to A or B IRIG Code Modulation Type Modulation You can set the IRIG code modulation type to AM or Pulse width Code PWCode Input Impedance Impedance You can set the input impedance to 50 Q or 5 kQ o The time synchronization feature has three conditions Unlock Lock and Stable When an IRIG signal is properly received the DL850 DL850V enters into the Lock condition Time acquisit
135. e absolute values of the specified waveform SQRT SQRT C2 Displays the square root of the specified waveform LOG LOG C1 Displays the log of the specified waveform EXP EXP C1 Displays the exponent of the specified waveform NEG NEG C1 Displays the specified waveform inverted around 0 SIN SIN T Displays the sine of the specified waveform COS COS C1 Displays the cosine of the specified waveform TAN TAN C1 Displays the tangent of the specified waveform ATAN ATAN C1 C2 Displays the arc tangent of the two specified waveforms a value within 17 PH PH C1 C2 Displays the phase difference between the two specified waveforms DIF DIF C1 Displays the derivative of the specified waveform DDIF DDIF C1 Displays the 2nd order derivative of the specified waveform INTG INTG C1 Displays the integral of the specified waveform IINTEG IINTEG C1 Displays the double integral of the specified waveform BIN BIN C1 Up Lo Displays the result of converting specified waveform to binary P2 P2 C1 Displays the square of the specified waveform P3 P3 C1 Displays the cube of the specified waveform F1 F1 C1 C2 Displays the result of computing V C12 C22 for the specified waveforms F2 F2 C1 C2 Displays the result of computing V C12 C2 for the specified waveforms FV FV C1 Displays the inverse of the PWHH of the pulse width PWHH PWHH M1 Up Lo PWHL PWHL C2 Up Lo PWLH PWLH C1 Up Lo PWLL PWLL C1 Up Lo PWXX PWXX C2 Up Lo DUTYH
136. e at Marker2 Y3 Vertical value at Marker3 Y4 Vertical value at Marker4 A Y2 Y1 Difference between the vertical values of Marker1 and Marker2 A Y3 Y1 Difference between the vertical values of Marker1 and Marker3 A Y4 Y1 Difference between the vertical values of Marker1 and Marker4 A Y3 Y2 Difference between the vertical values of Marker2 and Marker3 A Y4 Y2 Difference between the vertical values of Marker2 and Marker4 A Y4 Y3 Difference between the vertical values of Marker3 and Marker4 IM DL850 01EN 9 5 9 Cursor Measurement Angle Cursors Degree T Y waveforms You can measure time values and convert them to angles On the time axis set the zero point Ref Cursor1 position which will be the measurement reference the end point Ref Cursor2 position and the reference angle that you want to assign to the difference between Ref Cursor1 and Ref Cursor2 Based on this reference angle you can measure the angle between two angle cursors Cursor1 and Cursor2 Cursor1 Cursor2 i i l Reference angle 4 f I Ref Cursor1 L Ref Cursor2 Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Maths All 1 You can select the channel of an installed module 2 Ifthe 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module
137. e center and scale of the vertical axis 12 2 IM DL850 01EN 12 FFT Display Ratio of the Main Window Main Ratio P See here Window Layout Window Layout Set the display position of the FFT window Side Horizontal Vertical Vertical Horizontal Scale Horiz Axis Select one of the following horizontal scale types Hz A normal linear scale is used Log Hz Alogarithmic scale is used FFT Analysis on Models with User Defined Computation Option You can analyze the following types of spectrums on models with user defined computation G2 option Linear spectrums power spectrum densities cross spectrums transfer functions and coherence functions Turning FFT 1 and FFT 2 On and Off Display Set whether to perform FFT analysis If you set this to ON the FFT windows appear You can display separate FFT analysis results in the FFT 1 and FFT 2 windows ON FFT analysis is performed OFF FFT analysis is not performed FFT Settings FFT Setup Set the spectrum type the window function and the type of averaging Spectrum Type Type Sub Type Set the spectrum type Type Sub Type Description LS MAG Magnitude of the specified waveform s linear spectrum LS LOGMAG Logarithmic magnitude of the specified waveform s linear spectrum LS PHASE Phase of the specified waveform s linear spectrum LS REAL Real part of the specified waveform s linear spectrum LS IMAG Imaginary part of the sp
138. e displayed waveforms There are six trigger modes Auto Auto Level Normal Single N Single and On Start The trigger mode setting applies to all trigger types Trigger Types Triggers can be broadly divided into simple triggers and enhanced triggers Simple Triggers Input Signal Trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers when the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level in the specified way rising edge falling edge or rising or falling edge Time Trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers at the specified date and time and at specified intervals afterwards External Signal Trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers when the signal applied to the TRIG IN terminal passes through the specified trigger level in the specified way rising or falling edge Power Line Signal Trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers on the rising edge of the power supply signal that it is receiving This trigger enables you to observe waveforms in synchronization with the power supply frequency Enhanced Triggers A gt B N Trigger After state condition A is met the DL850 DL850V triggers when state condition B is met N times A Delay B Trigger After state condition A is met and the specified amount of time elapses the DL850 DL850V triggers when state condition B is first met Edge On A Trigger Enhanced While state condition A is met the DL850 DL850V triggers on the OR of multiple trigger source edges OR Trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers on t
139. e limits Actions Performed according to Determination Results The DL850 DL850V can print and save screen captures save waveform data beep and send e mails according to the results of GO NO GO determination IM DL850 01EN 1 7 1 Main Features Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module While normal voltage input modules have two main channels for analog input the 16 CH Voltage Input Module has 16 sub channels for analog input The 16 CH Voltage Input Module samples the measured sub channels in order Main channel sample rate 200 kS s When the number of measured sub channels is 16 all the sub channels are measured Sub channel sample rate 10 kS s 5 us pene Main channel MANAR sample clock Sub ch1 1 NER l l Sub Ch2 u l Timing of sub l channel Sub_Ch3 I i ll sampling j I E l Sub Ch16 T T I l When the number of measured sub channels is 2 sub channels 1 and 16 are measured Sub channel sample rate 100 kS s 5 us re epee Main channel I l sample clock PIT scm EMEN Sub Ch2 Timing of sub l channel Sub Ch3 1 l sampling m m I Sub Ch16 C 10 us 10 us The 16 CH Voltage Input Module only uses the odd main channels of the slot that it is inserted into It cannot use the slot s even main channels If you do not want to measure an individual s
140. e options below Edge The DL850 DL850V searches for edges Event The DL850 DL850V searches for an event Logic Pattern The DL850 DL850V searches for logic patterns This setting is only valid for logic modules Time The DL850 DL850V searches for a time IM DL850 01EN 15 1 15 Searching Waveforms Edge Search Edge Search for positions where the rising or falling slope of the specified waveform passes through the specified level Detected point for rising edge Level l Source i Search Conditions Setup Set the search conditions such as the waveforms to search judgment level polarity hysteresis count and bit settings Only on the channel of a logic module Source Waveform Trace Select the waveforms to search from the options listed below CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN 1 You can select the channel of an installed module 2 Ifthe 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16ch VOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel Judgment Level Level Set the level used to detect the rising or falling edges of the waveforms You can set the level to a value within the 10 div of the screen The resolution at which you can set the level varies depending on the module Polarity Polarity Select which type of edge to detect from the options listed below 4 Rising e Falling f Rising or fall
141. e range of 5 to 5 div In the Main window the box with solid lines is for Zoom1 and the box with dashed lines is for Zoom2 Waveforms are magnified around the centers of the zoom boxes O The Z1 or Z2 indicator on the front panel illuminates to show when the Zoom1 or Zoom2 window can be moved by the Mag or zoom POSITION knob Zoom Link If you press the Mag knob or zoom POSITION knob so that the Z1 and Z2 indicators both light you can move the zoom boxes while maintaining the spatial relationship between them The relationship between the zoom factors is also maintained Display Ratio of the Main Window Main Ratio Set the size of the main window in relation to the overall waveform display area 50 The main window appears in the upper half of the screen 20 The main window appears in the upper 20 screen 0 The main window is not displayed Window Layout Window Layout You can select the layout of the two zoom windows Side Horizontal Vertical Vertical 8 2 IM DL850 01EN 8 Zooming in on Waveforms Display Format Format Zoom1 and Format Zoom2 Select how to display the zoom windows from one of the options listed below If you select a number the zoom windows are divided evenly and waveforms are displayed within the divisions Main Same format as the Main window 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 Moving the Zoom Position to the Latest Position Move Zoom1 to Front and Move Zoom2 to Front You can move the
142. e record length or zoom in on the time axis The measured time values in cursor measurements and automated measurements of waveform parameters indicate the number of clock signal pulses For these measurements units are not displayed Hard disk recording cannot be used The dual capture feature cannot be used The trigger settings listed below are invalid Hold off trigger delay period trigger pulse width trigger Maximum Sample Rates for Each Module If you set the sample rate of the DL850 DL850V to a rate that is higher than a module s maximum sample rate because the data is updated at the module s maximum sample rate all the data within the module s data update interval will be the same The maximum sample rates for each module are listed below Maximum Sample Rate Module Internal Clock External Clock 701250 701255 10 MHz 9 5 MHz 701251 1 MHz 1 MHz 701260 701270 701271 701275 100 kHz 100 kHz when measuring voltage 100 kHz 100 kHz 19128101262 when measuring temperature 500 Hz 500 Hz 701280 25 kHz 25 kHz 701265 500 Hz 500 Hz 720210 100 MHz 9 5 MHz 720220 200 kHz 200 kHz 720230 LOGIC 10 MHz 9 5 MHz 720240 CAN MONITOR 100 kHz 100 kHz Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here IM DL850 01EN 5 Waveform Acquisition Dual Capture DUAL CAPTURE You can use dual capturing to simultaneously acquire waveform data main waveform in low speed roll mode
143. e the DL850 DL850V The bias current is 4 mA Bandwidth Bandwidth You can set the bandwidth limit to 40 Hz 400 Hz 4 kHz Auto or Full When you set the bandwidth limit to Auto an anti aliasing filter AAF and low pass filter are set in accordance with the sample rate and high frequency noise is removed from the input signal By using an anti aliasing filter when you measure voltages you can remove the aliasing in the FFT P See here Li The filters can be used not just in acceleration measurements but also in voltage measurements 2 26 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Zoom Method V Scale Zooming by Setting a Magnification V Zoom Zooming by Setting Upper and Lower Display Limits Upper Lower P See here Gain Gain You can set the ratio of the output signal to the input signal to a value from 0 1 to 100 The default setting is 1 Trace Settings Trace Setup P See here Sensitivity Sensitivity You can set the sensitivity of the acceleration sensor that you are using to a value between 0 10 mV Unit and 2000 00 mV Unit Unit Unit Set the unit of acceleration to be displayed using up to four characters The default setting is m s Change the unit as necessary Up to eight unit character strings can be stored in memory You can recall stored character strings by pressing the History soft key Also stored character strings can also be used by other acceleration modules on other channels This feature
144. e trigger position and the time reference point are displayed separately Trigger position Time reference point Viv 4 6 IM DL850 01EN 4 Triggering In Roll Mode In roll mode in which waveforms scroll from right to left the time reference point is displayed as indicated below When the Trigger Mode Is Auto Mode or Auto Level Mode The point in time when waveform acquisition was stopped is the time reference point right side of the screen Time reference point When the Trigger Mode Is Instant Start Mode On Start The point in time when waveform acquisition was started is the time reference point Time reference point Trigger Delay Delay The DL850 DL850V normally displays waveforms before and after the trigger point You can set a trigger delay to display waveforms that the DL850 DL850V has acquired a specified amount of time after the trigger occurrence Selectable range 0 00 us to 10000000 00 ys 10 s The default settings is 0 00 us Resolution 0 01 us T Trigger position Delay Trigger point o f you change the time axis setting using the TIME DIV knob so that the unit becomes larger because of display digit limitations the delay time that you set when the unit was small will not appear in the setting menu but it is retained You cannot specify a trigger delay when an external clock is being used as the time base IM DL8
145. ear as options when a logic input module is installed in a slot P See here State Condition B State To set state condition B select the states of the trigger sources in relation to the trigger level Example State Condition B CH1 H H The signal level must be high CH2 L L The signal level must be low CH3 X The signal is not used as a condition Bit 1 L Bit 2 H Bit 8 X CH4 X CH16 X Determination Mode Mode Set what kind of relationship must be established between the state condition B achievement time and the specified reference times Time or T1 and T2 for the DL850 DL850V to trigger B Time The DL850 DL850V triggers when the achievement time is shorter than the reference time Time and the state condition changes to not met B gt Time The DL850 DL850V triggers when the achievement time is longer than the reference time Time and the state condition changes to not met B TimeOut The DL850 DL850V triggers when the achievement time is longer than the reference time Time B Between The DL850 DL850V triggers when the achievement time is longer than reference time T1 and shorter than reference time T2 and the state condition changes to not met Reference Times Time T1 T2 You can set the reference times Time T1 and T2 within the following ranges Setting Selectable Range Default Resolution 0 02 us Time 0 02 us to 10000000 00
146. ear when Trace is set to All 9 6 IM DL850 01EN 9 Cursor Measurement X Y Waveforms Cursor Types Type The following types of X Y waveform cursors are available OFF Cursor measurement is not performed Horizontal cursors Horizontal Two horizontal cursors are used to measure vertical Y axis values Vertical cursors Vertical Two vertical cursors are used to measure horizontal X axis values Horizontal and vertical cursors H amp V Two horizontal cursors and two vertical cursors are used to measure vertical Y axis and horizontal X axis values Marker cursors Marker Four marker cursors that move on the waveform are used to measure waveform values Horizontal Cursors Horizontal Two dashed lines horizontal cursors appear on the horizontal axis You can measure the vertical Y axis value at the position of each horizontal cursor and measure the level difference between the horizontal cursors Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below XY1 to XY8 Moving the Cursors Cursor1 Cursor2 Use Cursor1 and Cursor2 to move the cursors Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the cursors within the range of 5 to 5 div in 0 01 div steps Measurement Items Item Setup You can measure the following vertical Y axis values at the cursor positions Y1 Vertical Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 Vertical Y axi
147. eas epe ane i dede 5 9 event search 15 4 expression 11 4 external clock es 3 1 extra WIN OW a disse desinere inae danda d 6 2 F Page FFT 12 1 App 7 FFT points number of 12 1 EFT settings iiie eere etin fl diVision aari erem repre tede teme eterne file list file name file operations ai file protection oti dee ederet fil s CODyIng za 5i Ls cot eet p M RARE ERE filter settings x TOME SIZO KEEPER foice WINKOW ste c repr ee ee Er nee echec prd format dual Capture 2 reef 5 9 frequency measurement sse 2 28 frequency module measurement principle App 19 IM DL850 01EN Index FIP Semeri ek as Ain b c ESSA full screen waveform display TUNCHIONS lial EX Seltilig s edere cire ih cet eee G Page galhiz eni aed 2 27 gauge factor ee 2 22 GND coupling setting 2 6 GO NO GO ins hpc tee ce te eb X Ce d e des 13 1 C M 6 2 H hard disk recording hard disk test liexadeciimal etaed t eter n etit tees Hilb rt f nction aurca teen te eee history sssss 16 1 history waveforms list of 16 3 history waveforms statistical processing of 10 10 history waveform search ssssssssseee 16 4 horizontal and vertical cursors T Y waveforms 9 4 horizontal and ver
148. easurement time period the time axis parameters are measured on the first period Logic waveforms cannot be automatically measured When automated measurement is performed on a waveform that has been recorded to a hard disk extra time will be required for hard disk access Automated measurement may require additional time depending on settings such as the memory length the number of measurement items and the input waveform During automated measurement ES appears in the center of the screen To cancel automated measurement set Mode to OFF Measurement stops immediately Only the Max and Min items can be measured for FFT waveforms Only the overall rms power spectrum value can be measured While the dual capture window is displayed you can perform automated measurements of waveform parameters on captured waveforms To perform automated measurement of the waveform parameters in the main window turn the display of the dual capture window off The automated measurement results of captured waveforms are displayed in italics 10 6 IM DL850 01EN 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Normal Statistical Processing Statistics While acquiring waveforms the DL850 DL850V calculates the statistics of the waveforms that it has acquired so far If you stop waveform acquisition and then restart it the DL850 DL850V will continue statistical processing and include the data from before waveform acquisition was stopped The DL
149. eature you can view the past waveform data history waveforms stored in the acquisition memory when waveform acquisition is stopped You can select specific history waveforms and display them You can also search through the history waveforms for waveforms that meet specified conditions Zone Search The DL850 DL850V searches for history waveforms that passed or did not pass through a specified search zone Waveform Parameter Search The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms whose measured waveform parameter values meet or do not meet specified conditions Dual Capturing You can use dual capturing to simultaneously record a trend at a low sampling speed in roll mode and at a high sampling rate This is useful for capturing fast phenomenon while observing a trend over a long period of time Main waveforms Captured waveforms low speed sampling high speed sampling Roll mode display Update mode display Sample rate Sample rate 100 kS s or less Faster than that of the main waveform IM DL850 01EN 1 5 1 Main Features Waveform Display The DL850 DL850V has a main window for displaying normal time domain waveforms zoom windows for displaying zoomed time axis waveforms and X Y windows for displaying X Y waveforms In addition you can split screens and change the sizes of waveform display areas so that waveforms and measured values are easier to see and display an FFT window that shows the results of FFT anal
150. ecified parameter is outside the specified range OFF The DL850 DL850V does not search for waveforms Source Waveforms and Parameters Source The DL850 DL850V searches through the specified parameter of the specified trace Trace You can specify one type of automatically measured waveform parameter However you cannot search through the waveforms of a logic module 16 CH Voltage Input Module or CAN bus monitor module Search Condition Upper and Lower Limits Upper and Lower Specify the range used to determine the condition of the specified parameter Search Logic Logic AND The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms that meet all the search conditions specified for Param to Param4 OR The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms that meet at least one of the search conditions specified for Param1 to Param4 Parameter Measurement Time Period Time Range1 Time Range2 You can set the measurement time period for the specified parameter by setting Time Range1 and Time Range2 The default settings are 5 div and 5 div The number of data points in the measured waveform can be up to 100 Mpoint from the start of the measurement time period Selectable range 5 div to 5 div The measurement time period is similar to the settable range of the cursor display position in cursor measurement For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions Search Execution Execute Search Searches for waveforms that meet the specified search condit
151. ecified waveform s linear spectrum PS MAG Magnitude of the specified waveform s power spectrum PS LOGMAG Logarithmic magnitude of the specified waveform s power spectrum PSD MAG Magnitude of the specified waveform s power spectrum density PSD LOGMAG Logarithmic magnitude of the specified waveform s power spectrum density CS MAG Magnitude of the cross spectrum of the specified two waveforms CS LOGMAG Logarithmic magnitude of the cross spectrum of the specified two waveforms CS PHASE Phase of the cross spectrum of the specified two waveforms CS REAL Real part of the cross spectrum of the specified two waveforms CS IMAG Imaginary part of the cross spectrum of the specified two waveforms TF MAG Magnitude of the transfer function of the specified two waveforms TF LOGMAG Logarithmic magnitude of the transfer function of the specified two waveforms TF PHASE Phase of the transfer function of the specified two waveforms TF REAL Real part of the transfer function of the specified two waveforms TF IMAG Imaginary part of the transfer function of the specified two waveforms CH MAG Magnitude of the coherence function of the specified two waveforms IM DL850 01EN 12 3 12 FFT Analysis Source Waveforms Source1 and Source2 Set the analysis source waveform to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math6 1 2 3 4 You can set Trace2 when Type is set to CS TF or CH You can select the channel of
152. ed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it Moving the Cursors Cursor1 Cursor2 Use Cursor1 and Cursor2 to move the cursors Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the cursors within the range of 5 to 5 div in 0 01 div steps IM DL850 01EN 9 1 9 Cursor Measurement Measurement Items Item Setup You can measure the following vertical values at the cursor positions Y1 Vertical value at Cursor1 Y2 Vertical value at Cursor2 AY Difference between the vertical values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Vertical Cursors Vertical T Y waveforms Two straight dashed lines appear on the vertical axis these are the vertical cursors You can measure the time between the trigger position and each cursor the time difference between the two cursors and the reciprocal of the time difference between the two cursors You can also measure the vertical signal value at each cursor position and the level difference between the two cursors Cursor1 Cursor2 x2 Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math8 All 1 You can select the channel of an installed module 2 If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor mo
153. ed on whether waveforms leave or enter the zone that you create using a base waveform When the reference condition is set to IN r a NO GO judgment is made here M Start of the l End of the determination range i i determination range Time Range1 Time Range2 Editing a Waveform Zone Edit Zone Select the number of the waveform zone you want to edit from the range indicated below If a zone has already been created for that number the zone will be displayed If no zone has been created for a number select a base waveform from the base waveform editing menu New and then edit the zone Zone 1 to Zone 6 Zone1 to Zone6 Cancel 1 The selected menu closes Editing a Base Waveform New When you create a new waveform zone you need to select the waveform that you will base it on the base waveform Select a waveform whose display is on CH1 to CH16 Cancel Cancel 1 You can select the channel of an installed module However you cannot select the channel of a logic module 16 CH Voltage Input Module or CAN bus monitor module 2 The selected menu closes Specifying the Editing Range Edit Select the part of the base waveform that you want to edit Whole Whole The whole waveform is within the editing range Part Part A portion of the waveform is within the editing range Whole Part Editing range Editing range boundary 1 boundary 2 Time Range1 Time Range2 IM DL850 01E
154. eeeeene waveforms zooming waveform zone GO NO GO Wave Window trigger WED SCIVER cti coset eim tue er ere Ce RHET ideae ex Window function aere tnter tn window layout dual capture window layout FFT window eseeen window layout X Y window eee window layout zoom window eeeene WINdOW types ea tede idera c D de ro dtr a da de ae X Page XY WINJOW o cote teet cal e ecce dA Le 7 1 Z Page ZENO CrOSS P 2 33 ZONE search ien nere sere ad cases ese els 16 4 zoom factor 8 2 zoom link 0 2 zoom method vertical we 2 9 zoom POSITION knob sssssseeeeennnenn 8 2 zoom window cssssssssseseeeeeeee nne enne 8 1 IM DL850 01EN Index 3
155. eform acquisition conditions and the number of waveforms that can be stored in the acquisition memory the number of history waveforms apply depending on the set record length P See here Li Notes about Setting the Record Length Increasing the record length automatically limits the number of channels that can be used When some channels are unavailable the number of channels that can be used appears in the record length soft key menu When the acquisition mode is set to Average the maximum record length is 5 Mpoint on standard models 10 Mpoint on models with the M1 option and 25 Mpoint on models with the M2 option When the dual capture feature is being used the maximum record length is 100 Mpoint on standard models 500 Mpoint on models with the M1 option and 1 Gpoint on models with the M2 option The maximum record length during hard disk recording is 50 Gpoint one channel When the trigger mode is Auto Auto Level Normal or N Single and the display is not in roll mode you can only select a record length that is less than 5 Mpoint on standard models 10 Mpoint on models with the M1 option or 25 Mpoint on models with the M2 option Onthe DL850 DL850V record lengths are expressed in units of points There are some products such as the DL750 for which record lengths are expressed in units of words IM DL850 01EN 5 1 5 Waveform Acquisition Acquisition Mode Acquisition Mode You can set the acquisiti
156. elay circuit is off normally 0 P2 X When the relay circuit is on and Shunt Cal Exec is performed the input value when the relay circuit is on is applied P2 Y Set the strain value that corresponds to the shunt resistance when the relay circuit is on Shunt calibration Strain After execution The gain is corrected Currentmeasured Before execution value id TD P2 X Strain input gt P is vey In the setup menu set the strain value corresponding to the shunt resistor to P2 Y Obtained automatically when shunt calibration is performed Executing Shunt Calibration Shunt Cal Exec Executes shunt calibration Unit String Unit String You can set the unit using up to four alphanumeric characters Display Type Display Type The same as the linear scaling settings for voltage measurement P See here For details about shunt calibration see appendix 4 Li When you execute shunt calibration select an appropriate range so that the measured values will stay within the range when the shunt calibration relay circuit is on The DL850 DL850V attempts to perform shunt calibration within the current range Anerror message will appear if shunt calibration fails because of out of range values or some other reason When this happens change the range and perform shunt calibration again IM DL850 01EN 2 25 2 Vertical Axis Acceleration Measurement For acceleration measurement the items
157. els Label P See here Vertical Scale SCALE knob You can select one of the following measurement ranges When USTR Is Selected 500u STR 1000USTR 2000USTR SOOOUSTR 10000USTR 200000STR For information about the measurement ranges see section 6 13 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN When mV V Is Selected 0 25 mV V 0 5 mV V 1 mV V 2 5 mV V 5 mV V 10 mV V For information about the measurement ranges see section 6 13 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN The number that appears to the right of the range display is the maximum input at the current bridge voltage converted into a voltage value It is the maximum input voltage for the selected range IM DL850 01EN 2 21 2 Vertical Axis Setting the Sensor Sensor Setup Bridge Voltage Excitation You can select the voltage to apply to the bridgehead 2V When the bridgehead resistance bridge resistance is 120 Q to 1000 O 5V When the bridge resistance is 350 Q to 1000 Q 10V When the bridge resistance is 350 Q to 1000 Q You cannot change the bridge voltage during waveform acquisition The bridge voltage can only be set to 5 V or 10 V when The bridge resistance is 350 O or more The strain gauge transducer supports a bridge voltage of 5 V or 10 V Gauge Factor Gauge Factor You can set the gauge factor of the strain gauge Selectable range 1 90 to 2 20 in steps of 0 01 The gauge factor is a constant that is unique to the gauge It shou
158. ent interval 40 us Pulse width T1 T2 T3 ees oa RR i a R E eooo Pulse width T2 T1 Duty T2 T1 T3 T1 App 20 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Computation Format Resolution of the Frequency Module The computation flow on the frequency module is indicated below ange value Orset r Internally all calculations are performed using floating point values Floating 4 2400 LSB div point data Floating point 1 LSB weight 2400 LSB Input computation Y Idiv 32 bit A c ly O D E ACQ gt s ec Computations float gt Float Binary p Memory Frequency 50 ns resolution Period L Binary Float Computation Float 16bit Binary floating point The frequency module measures the period of the input signal using a 32 bit counter at a resolution of 50 ns Therefore the minimum resolution of the counter values is 50 ns Computations are performed in floating point format The data that is output from the frequency module and written to the acquisition memory ACQ Memory is 16 bit binary data The frequency module converts the data using a weight of 1 LSB that is determined by Value div The data is normalized to 2400 LSB div when displayed on the screen Input Conversion from 32 bit Counter Values to Floating Point Values The frequency module converts the count value that it
159. er in which computation is performed in real time The computation interval for moving averages is 40 us 25 kHz It is constant independent of the sampling rate of the DL850 DL850V The moving average order the number of averaged points is specified in terms of time The maximum value is 25000 points when the time is set to 1000 ms The characteristics of the smoothing filter are as follows The filter is a low pass filter The pass band is flat The filter has linear phase characteristics The group delay is constant for a given filter order The group delay can be derived through the following equation Group delay the number of averaged points 1 x 40 us 2 The filter has comb shaped bandwidth characteristics The figure below shows the result of applying the smoothing filter to a waveform that changes in steps The smoothing filter setup time follows the step change Smoothing filter setup time bus Waveform after the smoothing filter is applied I Waveform before the smoothing i filter is applied I App 22 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Appendix 6 List of Preset Settings of the Frequency Module Logic 5V Setup Item Setting V Range 10 V Coupling DC Probe Yes Bandwidth Yes Threshold 2 5V Hys Yes Slope Yes Chattering Suppression Yes5 Pull Up No Logic 3V Setup Item Setting V Range x5 V Probe 1 1 10 V Probe 10 1 Coupling DC Probe Yes Bandwidth
160. erly when input signals are being applied to the DL850 DL850V Auto Calibration Auto Calibration Auto calibration is executed when you start signal acquisition if any of the time periods listed below has elapsed since the power was turned on Approx 3 minutes Approx 10 minutes Approx 30 minutes and every 30 minutes thereafter Snapshot SNAP SHOT Retains the currently displayed waveforms on the screen This feature allows you to update the display without having to stop waveform acquisition It is a useful feature when you want to compare waveforms Snapshot waveforms are displayed in white You cannot perform the following operations on snapshot waveforms Cursor measurement automated measurement of waveform parameters zoom or computation You can save and load snapshot waveforms Clear Trace CLEAR TRACE Clears all the waveforms that are displayed on the screen If you change the display format or perform other similar operations the DL850 DL850V redisplays the channel waveforms computed waveforms and loaded waveforms that were displayed before you executed the clear trace operation Snapshot and clear trace features are disabled When the DL850 DL850V is in remote mode When the DL850 DL850V is printing when it is executing auto setup or when it is accessing a storage medium When go no go determination is in progress when action on trigger is in progress or when searching is in progress 20 2
161. es With simple triggers such as the edge trigger the DL850 DL850V triggers when the trigger source level passes through the specified trigger level The range and resolutions that you can use to set the trigger level vary depending on the type of signal being measured When Measuring Voltage Selectable range 10 div two times the display range Resolution 0 01 div Example when the probe attenuation is 1 1 and the voltage scale is 2 mV div the resolution is 0 02 mV When Measuring Temperature Selectable range The range of thermocouple being used Resolution 0 1 C or 0 1 K When Measuring Strain Selectable range The range of the strain module being used Resolution 1 uSTR or 0 0005 mV V When Measuring Acceleration Selectable range 10 00 div Resolution 0 01 unit When Measuring Frequency Revolutions periods duty ratios power supply frequencies pulse widths pulse integration velocities When Monitoring CAN Bus Signals See section 6 13 in the getting started guide IM DL850 03EN Li You can normally set the trigger level using the jog shuttle and arrow keys If you press the NUM LOCK key so that it illuminates you can also enter numbers by pressing the CH key Trigger Slope Slope Slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level rising edge or from a high level to a low level falling edge When a slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope The
162. es waveforms each time the trigger conditions are met until a specified number of waveforms have been acquired and then displays all the acquired waveforms If no triggers occur the display is not updated Instant Start Mode On Start Regardless of the trigger settings when you press the START key the DL850 DL850V updates the displayed waveforms once and stops signal acquisition If the time axis is set to a value that would cause the display to switch to roll mode roll mode display will be enabled When data has been acquired up to the amount specified by the set record length the waveform display stops Li The trigger mode setting applies to all trigger types When waveforms are being acquired the trigger condition appears in the center of the bottom of the Screen IM DL850 01EN 4 1 4 Triggering Trigger Types Type The following trigger types are available Simple Simple Simple trigger Simply triggers on a trigger source edge In addition to using the signals analog signals and logic signals applied to the modules installed in the slots as trigger sources you can also use the time an external signal the signal applied to the TRIG IN terminal or the power line signal as a trigger source Enhanced Enhanced A gt B N trigger After state condition A is met the DL850 DL850V triggers when the state condition B is met N times A Delay B trigger After state condition A is met and the specified
163. esistor Turns on and off connected to the bridgehead automatically when shunt calibration is executed Bridge I Bridge 120 0 voltage IM DL850 01EN App 13 Appendix When correcting the gain on the positive side Shunt calibration relay circuit Built into the strain module Shunt resistor when Turns on and off correcting the positive side automatically when shunt calibration is executed Bridget jT Bridge voltage Bridge Shunt Calibration Procedure 1 Calculate the strain value uSTR that corresponds to the shunt resistor you will use For the calculation procedure see Calculating the Shunt Resistance in the next section 2 Execute balancing without applying a load to the strain gauge and correct the zero point 3 Execute shunt calibration and correct the gain To execute shunt calibration in the CH menu select Linear Scale Mode and then Shunt Usually the negative gain is corrected However if you are correcting the positive gain change the position of the shunt resistor as shown in the above figure Balance Strain A Before execution After execution Strain input The zero point is corrected when balancing is executed Shunt calibration After execution The gain is corrected Strain C rrenbineds Fed Before execution u u d value DL P2 x Strain input CN ee P2 Y e In the setup menu set the strain v
164. etwork You do not have to set it manually When DHCP is turned off you must set the appropriate IP address subnet mask and default gateway for the network DNS DNS is a system used to associate Internet host names and domain names with IP addresses Given AAA BBBBB com AAA is the host name and BBBBB com is the domain name You can use host names and domain names to access the network instead of using IP addresses which are just numbers The DL850 DL850V allows you to specify the host by name instead of by IP address Set the domain name and the DNS server address 0 0 0 0 by default For details consult your network administrator DNS Servers DNS Server1 DNS Server2 You can specify up to two DNS server addresses primary and secondary If querying fails with the primary DNS server the secondary DNS server is automatically used to find the mapping of the host name and domain name to the IP address Domain Suffixes Domain Suffix1 Domain Suffix2 The domain suffix is a piece of information that is automatically added when a query is made to a DNS server using only a portion of the domain name For example if BBBBB co jp is registered as a domain suffix and a query is made using AAA the name AAA BBBBB co jp is searched You can specify up to two domain suffixes Domain Suffix1 and Domain Suffix 2 You can use up to 127 characters The characters that you can use are 0 to 9 A Z a z and dashes TCP IP settings are a
165. f data points for cycle averaging is changed f you measure an averaged waveform with auto scaling enabled you cannot change the scaling by switching to manual scaling after measurement has stopped Changes to the scaling settings are applied to the next measurement n user defined computation averaging cannot be performed on pulse width computation f you change the computation conditions during averaging the computed data up to that point is deleted and averaging starts over 2 soon FFT Settings FFT Setup user defined FFT computation is performed when you specify an operator that uses FFT computation LS PS PSD CS TF or CH Set the number of FFT points the window function the damping rate and Force1 and Force2 The results of the FFT appear in the selected computation waveform Other than the fact that no FFT window is displayed this is the same as the FFT computation that can be performed from the FFT menu P See here Filter Settings Filter Setup user defined When using FILT1 and FILT2 in user defined computation set the digital filter type filter band and cutoff frequency for each of the two filters Filter1 and Filter2 Filter Type Filter Type and Filter Band Filter Band Filter Type Filter Type Filter Band Filter Band Gauss Low Pass Sharp Low Pass High Pass Band Pass IIR Butterworth Low Pass High Pass Band Pass CutOff1 and CutOff2 CutOff1 CutOff2 Set t
166. for the waveform in an X Y window FFT Displays the cursor measurement values for the waveform in an FFT window T Y Waveforms Cursor Types Type The following types of T Y waveform cursors are available OFF Cursor measurement is not performed Horizontal cursors Horizontal Two horizontal cursors are used to measure vertical values Vertical cursors Vertical Two vertical cursors are used to measure time values Horizontal and vertical cursors H amp V Two horizontal cursors and two vertical cursors are used to measure vertical and time values Marker cursors Marker Four marker cursors that move on the waveform are used to measure waveform values Angle cursors Degree Two angle cursors are used to measure angles Horizontal Cursors Horizontal T Y waveforms Two dashed lines horizontal cursors appear on the horizontal axis You can measure the vertical value at the position of each horizontal cursor and measure the level difference between the horizontal cursors Cursor1 Cursor2 Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math8 1 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is install
167. form data You can also rename and copy files and set or clear protection on files Storage Media You Can Save and Load From The DL850 DL850V can access the following five types of storage media for saving and loading data SD Memory Card SD 1 The SD memory card inserted into the SD memory card slot of the DL850 DL850V USB Storage Medium USB 0 or USB 1 A USB storage device that is connected to the DL850 DL850V USB port USB2 0 mass storage devices compatible with USB Mass Storage Class Ver 1 1 can be connected to the DL850 DL850V Internal Hard Disk HD 0 The internal hard disk installed on models with the HD1 option External Hard Disk HD 0 An external hard disk connected to the EXT HDD connector on models with the HDO option You can connect an external hard disk that supports eSATA Network Drive Network A storage device on the network You can use a network storage device by connecting the DL850 DL850V to an Ethernet network Li Notes about Using the USB Memory Connect USB storage media directly not through a USB hub Only connect a compatible USB keyboard mouse or storage device to the USB connector for peripherals Donot connect and disconnect multiple USB devices repetitively Provide a 10 second interval between removal and connection Do not connect or remove USB cables from the time when the DL850 DL850V is turned on until key operation becomes available approximately 20 to 30 seconds You can use USB s
168. forms are cleared To redisplay the waveforms use the history feature and select the record number of the waveforms that you want to display You can only select waveforms that have record numbers You cannot display earlier waveforms fthe DL850 DL850V does not trigger when the trigger mode is set to Normal the waveform intensity is retained until the next time the DL850 DL850V triggers IM DL850 01EN 6 5 6 Display Manual Event Manual Event Indicates the positions of manually input events You can only input manual events during hard disk recording or when the dual capture feature is enabled You can input manual events by applying a high low signal to the external start stop input EXT I O terminal or by turning a switch contact on and off You can enter up to 1000 events For the specifications of the EXT I O terminal see section 5 5 in the getting started guide IM DL850 O3EN Switching the Menu Area Display When the setup menu is displayed and you press the ESC key the menu disappears and the display switches to the full screen waveform display If you press the ESC key again the channel information of the waveforms whose displays are turned on appears If you press the ESC key yet again the numeric monitor for the waveforms whose displays are turned on appears Each time you press the ESC key the display switches between the full screen waveform display the channel information display and the numeric monitor displa
169. g the sample rate and the acquisition memory record length also change For details see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Record Length and Sample Rate in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN 3 2 IM DL850 01EN 3 Horizontal Axis Sample Rate If you change the time axis setting the sample rate also changes The sample rate is the number of samples per second S s Ifthe sample rate is comparatively low with respect to the input signal frequency the harmonics contained in the signal are lost When this happens some of the harmonics will be misread as low frequency waves due to the effects described by the Nyquist sampling theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing You can avoid aliasing by acquiring waveforms with the acquisition mode set to Envelope Aliased signal Input signal Sampled points Time Axis Setting and Roll Mode Display When the trigger mode is Auto Auto Level Single or On Start and the time axis setting is 100 ms div or longer instead of updating waveforms through triggering update mode the DL850 DL850V displays the waveforms in roll mode In roll mode waveforms scroll from right to left as new data is captured and the oldest values are deleted from the screen Ji This allows waveforms to be observed in the same way as on a pen recorder Roll mode is useful for observing signals with long repeating periods and signals that change slowly It is a
170. g thermocouple type the bandwidth limit trace settings temperature settings and the temperature unit You can connect a thermocouple to one of the temperature modules 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF or 701265 TEMP HPV and measure temperatures For information about how to connect thermocouples see section 3 8 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 O3EN Waveform Display Display Select whether to display each channel s input signal waveform ON Displays the waveform OFF Does not display the waveform Labels Label P See here Input Coupling Coupling Set the coupling to TC when you are measuring temperature using the 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF or 701265 TEMP HPV To measure voltage set the input coupling to an appropriate voltage measurement setting P See here Thermocouple Type Type Select the appropriate thermocouple type for thermocouple that you are using You can select thermocouple type from the options listed below When the input terminals are open the displayed value is less than or equal to the lower limit of the measurement range Measurement Range 200 to 1300 C 200 to 800 C 200 to 1100 C 200 to 400 C 200 to 900 C 200 to 400 C 0 to 1700 C 0 to 1700 C 400 to 1800 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 2300 C Au7Fe AuFe chromel 0 to 300 K S Z P o a c 7 3 m 5 a 3 Bandwidth Bandwidth You can set the bandwidth limit to 2 Hz 8 Hz
171. ge Scale value P1 Y P2 Y range 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Initial scale values P1 X 0 0000E 00 P1 Y 0 0000E 00 P2 X 5 0000E 00 P2 Y 100 0000E 00 Get Value Get Value Sets P1 X and P2 X to the current values the values displayed by the level indicator regardless of whether waveform acquisition is in progress or stopped Scale values ysax b x Ld Measured values d P1 X P2 X Measurement range le Unit String Unit String You can set the unit using up to four alphanumeric characters IM DL850 01EN 2 13 2 Vertical Axis Display Type Display Type When you measure voltage using a voltage module or measure strain using a strain module you can display the linearly scaled results using one of the following two methods Exponent Values are displayed in exponential notation Floating Values are displayed as decimal numbers For Decimal Number set the number of digits after the decimal point to Auto or a number from 0 to 3 For SubUnit set the unit prefix to Auto p n u m None k M G or T If you set Decimal Number to a number from 0 to 3 the specified number of digits after the decimal point are displayed If you select Auto all numbers will be displayed using five digits for example 1 0000 250 00 The default setting is Auto If you set SubUnit to a setting other than Auto numbers will be displayed with the specified unit prefix If you select Auto the DL850 DL850V will aut
172. gger occurs before a timeout which is approximately 1 second the DL850 DL850V updates the waveform in the same way that it does in Auto mode If a trigger does not occur the DL850 DL850V detects the center value of the trigger source amplitude automatically changes the trigger level to the center value triggers on that value and updates the displayed waveform Auto level mode is only valid if the trigger source is an analog waveform on a channel between CH1 and CH16 including sub channels For all other cases Auto Level mode operates in the same way as Auto mode If the time axis is set to a value that would cause the display to switch to roll mode roll mode display will be enabled Normal Mode Normal The DL850 DL850V only updates the waveform display when the trigger conditions are met If no triggers occur the display is not updated If you want to view waveforms that the DL850 DL850V cannot trigger on or if you want to check the ground level use Auto mode Single Mode Single When the trigger conditions are met the DL850 DL850V updates the displayed waveform once and stops waveform acquisition If the time axis is set to a range that causes the display to switch to roll mode the roll mode display will be enabled When the DL850 DL850V triggers it begins recording data When data has been acquired up to the amount specified by the set record length the waveform display stops N Single Mode SingleN The DL850 DL850V acquir
173. h Limit 500 Hz 5 kHz 50 kHz 500 kHz Full 400 Hz 4 kHz 40 kHz Full 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz Full 10 kHz 20 kHz 40 kHz 80 kHz 160 kHz 640 kHz 1 28 MHz 2 MHz Full 500 Hz Full 2 Hz 8 Hz 30 Hz Full 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz Full 40 Hz 400 Hz 4 kHz Auto Full 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz Full 2 When measuring voltage Auto cannot be selected on the 701261 3 Full cannot be selected when Preset is set to AC100V or AC200V For example on the 701251 HS1M16 you can set the bandwidth limit to 400 Hz 4 kHz or 40 kHz The frequency characteristics for the different bandwidth limits are shown below If you select Full the module s maximum bandwidth is used 3 dB i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n 1 Approx 400 Hz Approx 4 kHz Approx 40 kHz FULL Bandwidth Limitation on the 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF and the 701275 ACCL VOLT When you are measuring voltage using the 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF or when you are using the 701275 ACCL VOLT and the bandwidth is set to Auto the anti aliasing and low pass filter settings vary as shown below depending on the sample rate Sample Rate Anti Aliasing Filter Low Pass Filter 200 kS s or greater 40 kHz OFF 100 kS s 40 kHz OFF 50 kS s 20 kHz OFF 20 kS s 8 kHz OFF 10 kS s 4 kHz 4 kHz 5 kS s 2 kHz 4 kHz 2 kS s 800 Hz 4 kHz 1 kS s 400 Hz 400 Hz 500 S s 200 Hz 400 Hz 200 S s 80 Hz 400 Hz 100 S s 40Hz 40 H
174. hape of the displayed marker to one of the options below Mark A dot Line A crosshair Measurement Items Item Setup Marker cursors move on the waveform data You can measure the following values at the markers X1 Horizontal X axis value at Marker1 X2 Horizontal X axis value at Marker2 X3 Horizontal X axis value at Marker3 X4 Horizontal X axis value at Marker4 Y1 Vertical Y axis value at Marker1 Y2 Vertical Y axis value at Marker2 Y3 Vertical Y axis value at Marker3 Y4 Vertical Y axis value at Marker4 T1 Time from the trigger position at Marker1 T2 Time from the trigger position at Marker2 T3 Time from the trigger position at Marker3 T4 Time from the trigger position at Marker4 A T2 T1 Time difference between Marker1 and Marker2 A T3 T1 Time difference between Marker1 and Marker3 A T4 T1 Time difference between Marker1 and Marker4 FFT Waveforms Cursor Types Type The following types of FFT waveform cursors are available OFF Cursor measurement is not performed Marker cursors Marker You can use four marker cursors to measure frequencies levels and the distances between markers Peak cursors Peak You can use peak cursors to measure peak frequency and level values Marker Cursors Marker You can measure the frequency and level at each marker and the frequency and level differences between markers You can select a measurement source waveform for each cursor Markers Marker
175. hat is connected by GP IB has its own unique address in the GP IB system This address is used to distinguish one device from other devices Therefore you must assign a unique address to the DL850 DL850V when connecting it to a PC or other device Li Several cables can be used to connect multiple devices However no more than 15 devices including the controller can be connected on a single bus When connecting multiple devices you must assign a unique address to each device When the controller is communicating with the DL850 DL850V or with other devices through GP IB do not change the address Usecables that are 2 m or shorter in length to connect devices Keep the total length of the cables under 20 m When devices are communicating have at least two thirds of the devices on the bus turned on To connect multiple devices use a star or daisy chain configuration Loop and parallel configurations are not allowed IM DL850 01EN 20 3 20 Other Features Network Connects the DL850 DL850V to a PC using Ethernet O You must set TCP IP parameters to connect the DL850 DL850V to an Ethernet network P See here To connect the DL850 DL850V to a PC be sure to use straight cables through a hub Correct operation is not guaranteed for a one to one connection using a cross cable Useone of the following types of network cable that conforms to the transfer speed of your network A UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cab
176. he DL850 DL850V When the Damping Rate Is Set to 20 and Force 1 Is Set to 80 2 Original data Computed result from the exponential window Computed result from the exponential and force windows 0 L L L fi 0 20 40 60 80 A 100 Record length The outer area 80 to 100 of the record length is the average of the results of the window function for the data outside the area with no change to the damping rate Notes about Executing FFT Computation Computation is normally performed on the sampled data in the acquisition memory However for waveforms that have been acquired in envelope mode computation is performed on the maximum and minimum values per acquisition interval IM DL850 01EN App 11 Appendix Appendix 3 Fundamental Equations for Defining Strain Definition of Strain Strain L Initial length of the material AL Amount of change due to external strain Definition of the Gauge Factor Gauge factor K refers to the ratio between the mechanical strain and the change in the resistance of the strain gauge resistor eo RR T 2 ARIR K x sss 3 R Gauge resistance AR Amount of change in resistance when strain is applied Normally K 7 2 0 However the value varies depending on the strain gauge material General Equation for the Measured Voltage V and Strain of a Wheatsto
177. he OR of multiple trigger source edges AND Trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers on the AND of multiple trigger source conditions The DL850 DL850V triggers when all the specified conditions are met at a single point Period Trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers on a specified period of occurrence of state condition B The DL850 DL850V triggers when state condition B occurs again IM DL850 01EN 1 3 1 Main Features Pulse Width Trigger The DL850 DL850V triggers according to the relationship between the state condition B achievement time and the specified reference times Time or T1 and T2 Wave Window Trigger The DL850 DL850V creates real time templates Wave Window using a number of cycles directly preceding the current waveforms The DL850 DL850V compares the current waveforms to the real time templates and triggers if one of the current waveforms falls outside of its real time template Reference cycles example the waveforms for the four previous cycles Current waveform IN Measured waveform NY V A Average of 1 2 or V qs 4 cycles Real time template Trigger Tolerance gt Average waveform The DL850 DL850V tolerance compares the current waveform to the real time template and triggers if the current waveform falls outside of the real time template Trigger Source Trigger source refers to the signal that is used to check the specified trigger co
178. he cutoff frequency When Filter Band is set to Low Pass or High Pass set CutOff1 when Filter Band is set to Band Pass set CutOff1 and CutOff2 Selectable range 2 0 to 30 096 of the sample rate Resolution Steps of 0 296 of the sample rate IM DL850 01EN 11 9 11 Computation Constant Settings Constant Setup user defined Set values for K1 to K8 The selectable range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Notes about Computation FFT computation can be performed through the configuration of settings in the Math menu or the FFT menu gt See here In the FFT menu you can set the display format and choose a linear or logarithmic frequency domain horizontal axis scale The data point and window function settings are shared for the Math and FFT menus When you change the settings in one menu the settings in the other menu are also changed On models that do not have user defined computation G2 option when you enter the FFT menu and turn FFT computation on the Math7 operators become invalid and Math7 cannot be used On models that do have user defined computation when you enter the FFT menu and set FFT 1 and FFT 2 to ON Math7 and Math8 cannot be used When you perform FFT computation on 50 kpoint or more of data using the FFT menu you cannot use computed waveforms An icon 3 amp 8 appears in the center of the top of the screen when user defined computation is being executed Waveforms stored through hard disk recording
179. he operation keys to prevent unintentional changes to the current state of the DL850 DL850V Type Type Select whether to lock all the keys ALL or to lock all keys except the START STOP key Except START STOP Release Method Release Type Select whether to release the key lock by pressing the KEY PROTECT key Key or by entering a password Password Password Password Specify the password to use to release the key lock Specify the password using up to eight alphanumeric characters If you forget the password you can release the key lock by turning the DL850 DL850V on while holding down the RESET key Note that all settings will be initialized when you do this P See here Self Test Selftest You can test the keyboard and memory operations Test Type Type You can perform the following tests Key Test Key Board Tests whether the front panel keys are operating properly If the name of the key that you press is highlighted the key is operating properly Memory Test Memory You can test the internal memory to determine whether it is functioning normally If it is functioning normally Test Completed appears If an error occurs Failed appears SD Memory Card Test SD CARD You can test an SD memory card to determine whether it is functioning normally If it is functioning normally Test Completed appears If an error occurs Failed appears Hard Disk Test HDD You can test an internal or external hard dr
180. he settings in a list You can also copy the various vertical axis settings of one channel to another channel There are some items that cannot be configured from the ALL CH list P See here DL850 DL850V Measurement Items When the DL850 DL850V is equipped with the modules listed below it can measure voltage temperature strain acceleration frequency logic CAN bus signals and so on Voltage measurement 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO 10M12 701260 HV with RMS 720210 HS100M12 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701265 TEMP HPV 701275 ACCL VOLT Voltage measurement for the 16 CH Voltage Input Module 720220 16CH VOLT Temperature measurement 701261 UNIVERSAL 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 701265 TEMP HPV Strain measurement 701270 STRAIN NDIS 701271 STRAIN DSUB Acceleration measurement 701275 ACCL VOLT Frequency measurement 701280 FREQ Logic measurement 720230 LOGIC CAN Bus Signal Monitoring 720240 CAN MONITOR This module can only be used with the DL850V Li You can use auto setup to automatically configure the appropriate settings such as vertical axis horizontal axis and trigger settings for the input signal This feature is useful when you are not sure what type of signal will be applied to the DL850 DL850V The auto setup feature will not work properly on some input signals Also there are some modules with which the auto setup feature cannot be used P
181. he use of an external signal Action Action P See here Determination Period Time Range1 and Time Range2 You can set the determination period by setting Time Range1 and Time Range2 The default settings are 5 div and 5 div Selectable range 5 div to 5 div The determination period is similar to the settable range of the cursor display position in cursor measurement For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions P See here GO NO GO Determination Results The results of GO NO GO determination and the numbers of determinations and failures appear at the bottom of the screen Exe Count 10 Fail Count 2 Result XXOOOO LDetermination L Failure count bogus of whether reference count conditions 1 to 16 are met O Condition met X Condition not met XXOOOO No condition specified 1 2 3 16 Reference conditions In this example reference conditions 1 and 2 are not met while the conditions defined by base waveforms 3 to 6 are met IM DL850 01EN 13 3 13 GO NO GO Determination Waveform Parameters Parameter Set the upper and lower limits for automated measurement values of waveform parameters and perform GO NO GO determination based on whether the values are within or outside of the limits Judgment Conditions Judgement Setup For each of 16 judgment conditions you can set the source waveform waveform parameter and upper and lower waveform parameter limits You can
182. here Waveform Vertical Position Vertical POSITION knob P See here FV Setting F V Setup frequency measurement Measured Item Function You can choose one of the following items to measure Frequency Frequency Frequency Hz 1 Tw s Measurable range 0 01 Hz to 200 kHz Tw s 2 28 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Revolutions rpm Revolutions rps Revolution rpm Revolution rps Revolutions rpm Frequency Hz pulses per revolution Nr x 60 Measurable range 0 01 rpm to 100000 rpm Revolutions rps Frequency Hz pulses per revolution Nr Measurable range 0 001 rps to 2000 rps ae Number of pulses per rotation Nr Periods Period Period s Tw s Measurable range 5 us to 50 s Duty Ratios Duty Duty 96 7 Thigh s Tw s Or Duty 96 Tlow s Tw s Measurable range 096 to 10096 Tw s Thigh s Tlow s Power Supply Frequencies Power Freq Power supply frequency Hz 7 1 Tw s Resolution 0 01 Hz Measurable range 50 Hz 60 Hz or 400 Hz 20 Hz Tw s Pulse Widths Pulse Width Pulse width s Thigh s Or pulse width s Tlow s Measurable range 2 us to 50 s Thigh s Tlow s IE Pulse Integration Pulse Integ Pulse integration N count x physical amount per pulse I Set the physical amount per pulse I to the distance or flow rate A suitable user defined unit can be assigned to the specified physical amount Measur
183. here of the simple trigger Li Operating Conditions of the Wave Window Trigger You can use the wave window trigger with the following waveforms and settings You cannot use the wave window trigger when the record length is 25 kpoint or less and the time axis setting is shorter than 10 ms div Waveforms AC waveforms and triangular waveforms between 40 kHz and 1 kHz The trigger cannot be used with rectangular waveforms such as inverter waveforms or waveforms with fast rising edges Sample rate 10 kS s to 500 kS s Acquisition mode Normal Trigger mode Normal Single Single N When the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level it is difficult for the wave window trigger to occur Dual capture feature OFF IM DL850 01EN 5 Waveform Acquisition Based on the data that has been stored in the acquisition memory the DL850 DL850V performs various operations such as displaying waveforms on the screen computing measuring cursors and automatically measuring waveform parameters This chapter explains how to set the number of data points to store in the acquisition memory the record length how to enable or disable the sample data averaging feature and so on Record Length Record Length Record length refers to the number of data points that are stored to the acquisition memory for each channel Display record length refers to the data points from the data stored in the acquisition memory that are displayed
184. hod DIV SPAN offset Offset position Position magnification for zooming V Zoom display range limits for Zooming Upper Lower Linear Scaling Linear Scale You can configure the linear scaling settings of all sub channels while viewing the settings in a list The settings that you can view and configure are listed below Linear scaling Linear Scale A and B for AX B or P1 X P1 Y P2 X and P2 Y for P1 P2 unit string Unit display mode Disp Type number of decimal places Decim Num unit prefix Sub Unit Copy Copy to You can copy the various vertical axis and linear scaling settings of one sub channel to another sub channel Source sub channel Source Sub Channel You can set the source sub channel to a channel from channel 1 to 16 Destination sub channel DestinationSub Channel You can set the destination sub channels by using the following options Select ALL ON to select all sub channels select ALL OFF to unselect all sub channels and select individual sub channels by selecting numbers 1 to 16 Execute Execute Select Execute to copy the settings Li The waveform display color and label settings are not copied Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here 2 18 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Temperature Measurement For temperature measurement the items that have to be set for each input signal CH1 to CH16 include vertical scales the vertical positions input couplin
185. ic year month day and time Search Conditions Setup Specify the time that you want to search for Set the year Year month Month day Day hour Hour minute Minute second Second and microsecond uSecond Searched Waveform Display Result Window P See here Executing a Search Execute The DL850 DL850V displays the waveforms of the area around the specified time expanded in the zoom window gt See here Notes about Searching Waveforms You cannot search during data acquisition The search results are invalid after you Start data acquisition Change the settings Undisplayed waveforms and waveforms stored through hard disk recording are not included in searches If you invert or change the offset voltage of a waveform that has been selected as a waveform to search the search is performed on the new waveform Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here IM DL850 01EN 15 5 16 Displaying and Searching History Waveforms Acquisition memory stores waveforms that are displayed on the screen and waveform data that have been acquired in the past The history feature allows you to display or search past waveforms history waveforms You can perform the following operations on history waveforms Display You can display any single waveform or display all waveforms and highlight only the specified waveform You can also list the timestamps the trigger times of all history
186. ignals first parameter of one waveform and two waveform FFTs Force2 You can configure this setting when Window is set to Exponential This setting applies to the output response signal second parameter of a two waveform FFT It can be set in the same manner as Force1 100 Force Y 100 Weight Damping X rate FFT computation data points aca al rc PN e Average Average FFT analysis data can be linearly or exponentially averaged and its peak values can be computed These settings are the same as those for user defined computation P See here 12 4 IM DL850 01EN 12 FFT Notes about FFT Computation Notes about Displaying Power Spectrums You cannot display a power spectrum if the display record length is less than the number of computed data points The following settings are shared for all computation channel FFT Points Window and Start Point You cannot magnify an FFT waveform along the horizontal access so that 50 points or fewer are displayed Notes about Computation Computation is normally performed on the sampled data in the acquisition memory For waveforms that are acquired in Envelope mode computation is performed on the maximum and minimum values at each acquisition interval FFT computation can be performed through the configuration of settings in the Math menu or the FFT menu The data point and window function settings are shared for the Math a
187. ing Executes statistical processing You can select Execute Measure when Mode is set to Cycle Statistics or History Statistics Press Abort to stop statistical processing o The number of cycles being used for the cyclic statistical processing is displayed in the statistical display s Count column The number of cycles that can be used in cyclic statistical processing varies depending on the number of measured items that the DL850 DL850V is calculating the statistics of 64000 the number of measured items that the DL850 DL850V is calculating the statistics of IM DL850 01EN 10 9 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Result Display Display Result Displays a list of calculated statistics You can display the list of statistics wnen Mode is set to Cycle Statistics or History Statistics Numbers are assigned to the data in order from the oldest cycle data or history data and the automated measurement results for each number are displayed The maximum and minimum values for each parameter are indicated on the list by T maximum value and minimum value If the same value appears in multiple locations the oldest occurrence of the value is marked as the maximum or minimum value The number of data points that can be listed is 64000 If the number of data points exceeds 64000 the most recent data points in the history waveform or automatically measured item data are displayed If the number of data points e
188. ing Hysteresis Hysteresis You can set a range hysteresis within which level changes are not treated as edges You can set the hysteresis to one of the settings below The hysteresis widths vary depending on the input module A Low hysteresis 3A Medium hysteresis e ZW High hysteresis Bit Settings Bit Setting For each bit from Bit1 to Bit8 you can select which type of edge to detect from the options listed below This setting is only available for the channels of logic modules The DL850 DL850V searches based on the OR of each bit e Rising e Falling t Rising or falling The signal is not used as a trigger condition Count Count Set the number of times the specified edge 3 or f4 must repeat You can select a number from 1 to 1000000 15 2 IM DL850 01EN 15 Searching Waveforms Searched Waveform Display Result Window You can select whether to display the zoomed area around the point specified by Pattern No in Zoom1 or Zoom2 You only need to make this selection when both the Zoom1 and Zoom2 displays are turned on Li If the Zoom1 and Zoom displays are both off and you press SEARCH the Zoom1 display turns on Detected Point Number Pattern No Specify the number of the detected point to display in the zoom window The maximum detected point number is 1000 If the search does not yield any results No Match appears Search Range Start Point and End Point Set the search
189. ints Interpolation zone refers to the condition in which a given number of data points are not contained in the 10 div along the time axis The number of data points that define the interpolation zone varies depending on the display record length and zoom ratio You can set the interpolation method to one of the options below OFF Displays the data using dots without interpolation Sine Interpolation Sine Interpolates a sine curve between two points using the sinx x function This method is suitable for the observation of sine waves Linear Interpolation Line Linearly interpolates between two points Pulse Interpolation Pulse Interpolates between two points in a staircase pattern Outside of the Interpolation Zone If the interpolation method is set to Sine Line or Pulse the dots are connected vertically If the number of data points is 2002 or greater the DL850 DL850V determines the P P compression values the maximum and minimum sampled data values in a given interval and displays vertical lines rasters connecting each pair of maximum and minimum P P compression values i l OFF Sine Line Pulse In the Interpolation Zone Ps S 1 Pi F i El e Greece OFF Sine Line Pulse O The interpolation method is set to Pulse when The input signal is a logic signal The acquisition mode is Envelope 6 4 IM DL850 01EN 6 Display Setting the
190. ion you can use a rich variety of functions Square root trigonometric functions differentiation integration digital filtering six types of FFT functions and so on to define up to eight equations Cursor Measurement There are cursors for T Y time axis X Y and FFT waveforms You can position a cursor over a waveform to view the various measured values at the intersection of the cursor and the waveform Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters You can use this feature to automatically measure waveform levels maximum values frequencies and other values For up to 100 Mpoint of waveform data you can measure 29 waveform parameters including the delay between channels that relate to the voltage axis time axis and waveform area You can display a total of 32 measured values for all the waveforms You can save a total of 64000 items of data for all the waveforms You can also perform computations on measured waveform parameter values You can display the following statistics for the specified waveform parameter The maximum value Maximum minimum value Minimum average value Average standard deviation SDev and number of measured values used to calculate statistics Count IM DL850 01EN 1 Main Features There are three statistical processing methods Normal statistical processing While acquiring waveforms the DL850 DL850V measures the measurement items and calculates the statistics of the waveforms that
191. ion and synchronization are possible after 1 s A few minutes after the DL850 DL850V enters the Lock condition it enters into the Stable condition In the Stable condition the internal clock of the DL850 DL850V is synchronized to within 10 ppm of the GPS Language Language Sets the language that is used in the setup menu and messages The available languages vary depending on the DL850 DL850V model that you are using Adjusting the LCD LCD You can turn off the LCD and adjust its brightness Adjusting the Brightness Brightness You can adjust the brightness in the range of 1 darkest to 9 brightest You can prolong the LCD service life by decreasing the LCD brightness or by turning off the LCD when you do not need to view it Turning Off the LCD LCD Turn OFF You can turn off the LCD When the LCD is off you can turn it back on by pressing a key Automatically Turning Off the LCD Auto OFF The LCD turns off automatically when there are no key operations for a given time period The LCD turns back on when you press a key Formatting Storage Media Storage Manager You can format storage media Li If you format a storage medium all saved data is erased USB Keyboard Language USB Keyboard Sets the USB keyboard language to English or Japanese The USB keyboard can be used to enter file names comments etc 20 6 IM DL850 01EN 20 Other Features USB Communication USB Function You can specify the communi
192. ions and displays only the waveforms and timestamps that are detected Notes about Using the History Feature Notes about Configuring the History Feature You cannot use the history feature when you are using the dual capture feature or during hard disk recording When the acquisition mode is set to Average you cannot use the history feature f you stop waveform acquisition even if one complete screen s worth of waveform data has not been acquired the waveform at which the trigger occurred is displayed as a single history waveform f you stop waveform acquisition and then start it again without changing the waveform acquisition conditions the waveform data continues to be stored in the acquisition memory f you change the waveform acquisition conditions and start waveform acquisition the past data stored in the acquisition memory is cleared An averaged waveform cannot be displayed for the following waveforms Waveforms with record lengths of 250 kpoint or greater on the standard model 1 Mpoint or greater on models with the M1 option or 2 5 Mpoint or greater on models with the M2 option IM DL850 01EN 16 5 16 Displaying and Searching History Waveforms Notes about Recalling Data Using the History Feature You cannot use the history feature while waveform acquisition is in progress The settings are restricted so that the following relationship is retained Last record End Record lt Selected Record s first rec
193. is automatically converted to the appropriate velocity for the specified time Unit Setting Unit Set the unit of velocity to be displayed using up to four characters The default setting is m s Filter Filter Smoothing Smoothing The frequency module can display waveforms using real time moving averages of the data The moving average order can be set through the specification of a time value from 0 1 ms to 1 s the maximum number of averages is 25000 The number of averages performed moving average order the specified time 40 us The smoothing filter has the following characteristics Smoothes out staircase patterns Enables you to reduce measurement jitter and increase the resolution Because of the increased resolution you can perform high precision measurements especially when you measure high frequencies or use the offset feature and enlarge the waveform Can be used with all frequency module measurement items CH S800 Wz lt lt Hains IN gt gt When using the smoothing filter Filter order 400 ms Original waveform 0 oHz L500 0000s 1500 000ns IM DL850 01EN 2 31 2 Vertical Axis When using the offset function and making measurements by expanding near 100 kHz ers 101000 URz aint 200k gt gt Original waveform 39000 0Hz Value div 200 Hz div Upper display limit 101 kHz Lower display limit 99 kHz CATO 101000 Hz When using the
194. is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel 4 Cursor measurement is performed on all channels Moving the Cursors Cursor1 Cursor2 Use Cursor1 and Cursor2 to move the cursors Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the cursors within the range of 5 to 5 div in steps of the following size Time div x 10 display record length Reference Angle Ref Value Set the reference angle you want to assign to the range defined by Ref Cursor1 and Ref Cursor2 Selectable range 1 to 720 References Ref1 Ref2 Set the zero point Ref Cursor1 and the end point Ref Cursor2 Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the cursors within the range of 5 to 5 div in steps of the following size Time div x 10 display record length Measurement Items Item Setup The DL850 DL850V measures the angle cursor Cursor1 and Cursor2 positions as angles X1 Angle of Cursor1 from Ref Cursor1 X2 Angle of Cursor2 from Ref Cursor1 AX Angle difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 Y1 Vertical value at the intersection of Cursor1 and the waveform Y2 Vertical value at the intersection of Cursor2 and the waveform AY Difference in the vertical values at the points where Cursor1 and Cursor2 intersect the waveforms 1 When Trace is set to All the values for the channels of all installed modules the sub channels and the Math channel are measured 2 This option does not app
195. is useful when you want to set multiple channels to the same unit The stored character strings are not cleared when you turn the power off IM DL850 01EN 2 27 2 Vertical Axis Frequency Measurement For frequency measurement the items that have to be set for each input signal CH1 to CH16 include vertical scales the vertical positions FV settings the input settings the zoom method the offset trace settings and linear scaling You can connect a sensor or probe to the 701280 FREQ frequency module and measure frequencies revolutions periods duty ratios power supply frequencies pulse widths pulse integration and velocities For the sensor connection method see section 3 12 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN For the probe connection method see section 3 5 Waveform Display Display Labels Label Vertical Scale SCALE knob Waveform Vertical Position Vertical POSITION knob FV Settings F V Setup Settings for Each Item nput Setup Input Setup Zoom Method V Scale Zooming by Setting a Magnification V Zoom Zooming by Setting Upper and Lower Display Limits Upper Lower Offset Offset Trace Settings Trace Setup Linear Scaling Linear Scale Waveform Display Display Select whether to display each channel s input signal waveform ON Displays the waveform OFF Does not display the waveform Labels Label P See here Vertical Scale SCALE knob P See
196. it has acquired so far Cyclic statistical processing measurement and statistical processing are performed for each period The DL850 DL850V divides the waveform into periods starting at the left side of the screen the oldest waveform and moving to the right side of the screen measures the selected measurement items within each period and performs statistical processing on the measurement items Statistical processing of history waveforms The DL850 DL850V measures the measurement items and calculates the statistics of history waveforms Measurement and statistical processing begin with the oldest waveform GO NO GO Determination This feature is useful for signal testing on production lines and for tracking down abnormal phenomena The DL850 DL850V determines whether the waveform enters the specified range When the DL850 DL850V returns a GO or NO GO result specified actions are performed Determination Methods Waveform Zone The DL850 DL850V returns GO NO GO results based on whether waveforms leave or enter the zone that you create using a base waveform The DL850 DL850V returns a GO or NO GO judgment according to the determination i condition c Specified zone Determination area 1 Waveform Parameter Set the upper and lower limits for automated measurement values of waveform parameters The DL850 DL850V performs GO NO GO determination based on whether the values are within or outside of th
197. iv to 2 V div These values are for when the probe attenuation is 1 1 Multiply the values by 10 when the attenuation is 10 1 by 100 when the attenuation is 100 1 and by 1000 when the attenuation is 1000 1 IM DL850 01EN 2 3 2 Vertical Axis Measurement and Display Ranges The measurement range of the DL850 DL850V is 10 div with 0 V in the center the absolute width or span is 20 div The default display range setting is 5 div the span is 10 div Using the features listed below you can move and scale the displayed waveform so that parts of it that were outside of the display range are displayed Vertical position adjustment Offset voltage setting Vertical zoom PEE NEN wea ak ri 10 div hA Y 5 div Measurement ov Display range range 20 div 10 div 5 div 10 div CONCUEUNC 2400 levels i S x ees O How to Measure the Voltage with High Accuracy To measure the voltage with high accuracy increase the vertical scale so that the input signal is measured with the largest possible amplitude To display multiple waveforms so that they do not overlap without dividing the screen you have to set the vertical scale to a low value This prevents you from taking advantage of the A D converter s resolution However if you divide the screen and arrange the waveforms in the divided screens they will not overlap and you can raise their vertical scales
198. ive to determine whether it is functioning normally If it is functioning normally Test Completed appears If an error occurs Failed appears Printer Test Printer Tests whether the optional built in printer is operating properly If the print density is correct the built in printer is operating properly If an error occurs the built in printer does not print properly Update Version Up Select this option to update the firmware For details on updating firmware versions contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM DL850 01EN 20 9 20 Other Features Executing a Test Test Exec The selected self test starts If an Error Occurs during a Self Test If an error occurs even after you carry out the following procedure contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Execute the self test again several times Check whether the media being tested is properly inserted Check that the paper is set properly in the built in printer and that paper is not jammed Overview Overview You can display the following information about the DL850 DL850V Model Record Length Serial Number Product ID Unique number assigned to each instrument This number is necessary for the purchase of additional options Slot Names of the inserted modules Options Default Language Firm Version Firmware version number FPGA1 2 Version FPGA1 2 version number The 70126 701280 and 720240 modules have internal CPUs and firmware For slots that have these
199. ld be listed in the manual or other documentation for your gauge You cannot change the gauge factor during waveform acquisition Gauge Factor When mV V Is Selected Gauge Factor K On the DL850 DL850V you can specify the gauge factor If there is no recommended gauge factor for the strain gauge transducer set the gauge factor to 2 00 For factors other than 2 00 e is computed with in the DL850 DL850V using the following equation e 4 K x VIE e The measured value of the strain gauge transducer mV V V The measured bridge voltage V E The applied bridge voltage V K The gauge factor When you change the unit of a channel the units for all the items related to the channel change Upper and lower limits Upper Lower Trigger level Level Automated measurement values of waveform parameters cursor measurement values etc Performing Strain Balancing Exec Balance You can automatically compensate for the unbalanced part of the bridge resistance It takes a few seconds for balancing to be performed Range within which balancing is performed e 110000 uSTR when p STR is selected e 5mVNN when mVN is selected Bandwidth Bandwidth You can set the bandwidth limit to 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz or Full P See here Display Range Upper Lower To display the measured waveform on the screen clearly you can set upper and lower display range limits that are appropriate for the input Selectable range e 3 0000
200. le An STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable 20 4 IM DL850 01EN 20 Other Features System Configuration System Configuration You can specify the following settings DL850 DL850V date and time Language Click sound on off LCD adjustment Format Internal Memory USB Keyboard Language USB Communication Date and Time Settings Date Time The DL850 DL850V date and time Turning the Display On and Off Display Set whether to display the date and time on the DL850 DL850V screen Display Format Format You can display the date in one of the following formats 2010 06 30 year numeric month day 30 06 2010 day numeric month year 30 JUN 10 day English abbreviation of the month last two digits of the year 30 JUN 2010 day month English abbreviation year Date and Time Settings Date Time Sets the date and time Time Difference from Greenwich Mean Time Time Diff GMT Set the time difference between the region where you are using the DL850 DL850V and Greenwich Mean Time Selectable range Set the time difference in the range of 12 hours 00 minutes to 13 hours 00 minutes For example Japan standard time is ahead of GMT by 9 hours In this case set Time Hour to 9 and Minute to 00 Checking the Standard Time Using one of the methods below check the standard time of the region where you are using the DL850 DL850V Check the Date Time Language Regional Options on your PC Check the standard time at th
201. lled in a slot P See here Edge Detection Condition Edge Set the conditions for detecting each trigger source edge F An edge is detected when the trigger source changes from a level below the trigger level to a level above the trigger level rising Y An edge is detected when the trigger source changes from a level above the trigger level to a level below the trigger level falling IN An edge is detected when the trigger source enters the specified level range OUT An edge is detected when the trigger source leaves the specified level range The signal is not used as a trigger condition IN and OUT are only selectable when the trigger source is an analog signal CH1 to CH16 Trigger Level Level Set these items for each trigger source When the Edge Detection Condition Is 4 or Set the level used to detect the trigger source s rising or falling edge P See here When the Edge Detection Condition Is IN or OUT An edge is detected when the trigger source enters IN or leaves OUT the specified level range You can specify the level range settings for each analog signal trigger source IN Edge detection OUT Edge detection TU Width Width Width Level Level al Edge detection J Setting Selectable Range Resolution Level center value Width Width Same as the trigger level Trigger Hysteresis Hys Set this item for each trigger source This item is the same as
202. ls that have not been specified as search source channels are also displayed However you cannot search through the waveforms of a logic module 16 CH Voltage Input Module or CAN bus monitor module Search Window Upper and Lower Limits Upper and Lower You can set the limits within 5 div You can set them in 0 01 div steps You cannot set the upper limit to a value that is less than the lower limit Left and Right Sides of the Search Window Left and Right You can set the left and right sides within the range of 5 div The resolution is 10 div display record length You cannot set the left side to a value that is greater than the right side Search Logic Logic AND The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms that meet all the search conditions specified for Zone1 to Zone4 OR The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms that meet at least one of the search conditions specified for Zone1 to Zone4 16 4 IM DL850 01EN 16 Displaying and Searching History Waveforms Search Condition Settings for Waveform Parameter Searching Search Setup Search Parameter Select Param You can register four search conditions to Param1 to Param4 For each search condition you can change the channels to search the search condition and the search range Search Condition Condition IN The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms in which the specified parameter is within the specified range OUT The DL850 DL850V searches for waveforms in which the sp
203. lso effective when you want to detect occasional glitches pulse signals in the waveform Li You can use auto setup to automatically configure the appropriate settings such as vertical axis horizontal axis and trigger settings for the input signal This feature is useful when you are not sure what type of signal will be applied to the DL850 DL850V The auto setup feature will not work properly on some input signals Also there are some modules with which the auto setup feature cannot be used P See here Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here IM DL850 01EN 3 3 4 Triggering A trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen A trigger occurs when the specified trigger condition is met and a waveform is displayed on the screen Trigger Mode MODE The trigger mode determines the conditions for updating the displayed waveforms There are six trigger modes Auto Mode Auto If the trigger conditions are met before an approximately 50 ms timeout the DL850 DL850V updates the displayed waveforms on each trigger occurrence If not the DL850 DL850V automatically updates the displayed waveforms Even when Auto mode is specified the DL850 DL850V operates in Normal mode when the trigger source is set to Time and a simple trigger is used If the time axis is set to a value that would cause the display to switch to roll mode roll mode display will be enabled Auto Level Mode AutoLevel If a tri
204. ltage V Low Low voltage V Average Avg Average voltage 1 n 2xi V Middle Mid Max Min 2 V RMS Rms voltage 1 Vn xN 2 V Std Deviation SDev Standard deviation 1 n Zxi2 Zxi 2 n 2 V Overshoot Over Overshoot Max High High Low x 100 Overshoot Over Undershoot Low Min High Low x 100 96 1 Ona channel that has been set to power spectrum computation PS or PSD if RMS is set to ON Rms overall value appears on the screen The names in parentheses are the measurement item names that appear when the measured values are displayed wa High Low Time Measurement Items Rise Rise time s Fall Fall time s Frequency Freq Frequency Hz Period Period s Width Time width of the portion that is greater than the mesial value s Width Time width of the portion that is less than the mesial value s Duty Duty cycle Width Period x 100 96 Avg Frequency Avg F Average frequency in the measurement time period Hz Avg Period Avg P Average period in the measurement time period s The names in parentheses are the measurement item names that appear when the measured values are displayed Period H Width Width l a High 100 Low 0 10 2 IM DL850 01EN 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Pulse Pulse count Set the measurement time peri
205. lues They are not strictly warranted Trigger Hold Off Hold Off The trigger hold off feature temporarily stops the detection of the next trigger once a trigger has occurred This feature is useful in cases when you want to change the waveform acquisition interval such as when you are observing a PCM pulse code modulation code or other pulse train signal or when you are using the history feature Repeating interval T a Trigger level I Input signal recess evertere cesser usas pessceesccxcs p acera sese eene Trigger source signal Trigger signals that have been suppressed over the hold off period t when the trigger slope is set to rising eto Selectable range 0 00 us to 10000000 00 ys 10 s The default settings is 0 00 us Resolution 0 01 us Li To trigger with the hold off time set to 50 ms or longer set the trigger mode to Normal For the A gt B N and A Delay B triggers the hold off time only applies to state condition B The trigger hold off time does not apply to the simple trigger when the trigger source is Time to the period trigger or to the manual trigger IM DL850 01EN 4 5 4 Triggering Trigger Position Position When you move the trigger position the ratio of the displayed data before the trigger point the pre trigger section to the data after the trigger point the post trigger point changes When the trigger delay is 0 s the trigger point and trigger
206. m Display Result Window P See here Event Type Select Event Select the type of event that you want to detect Capture A dual capture event Manual A manual event assigned through the application of a signal to the EXT I O terminal Executing a Search Execute The DL850 DL850V displays the waveforms of the area around the selected event number expanded in the zoom window P See here Logic Pattern Search Logic Pattern The DL850 DL850V searches for the specified logic pattern This setting is only valid for logic modules Search Conditions Setup Set the following search conditions the waveforms to search bit settings and count Source Waveform Trace Select the waveforms to search from the options listed below CH1 to CH16 Youcan only select the channel of a logic module Bit Settings Bit Setting To set the logic signal pattern that you want to detect set the signal states for Bit1 to Bit8 The DL850 DL850V searches based on the AND of each bit H High level L Low level X The state of the bit is not used as a condition Count Count Set the number of times the specified pattern must repeat You can select a number from 1 to 1000000 Searched Waveform Display Result Window Detected Point Number Pattern No Search Range Start Point and End Point Executing a Search Execute P See here 15 4 IM DL850 01EN 15 Searching Waveforms Time Search Time Search for a specif
207. maged Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Burnout Burn Out Sets the operation to perform when thermocouple detects a burnout circuit break ON When a burnout is detected the measured value is fixed at the upper limit of the measurement range of thermocouple OFF Burnouts are not detected The default setting is OFF 2 20 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Strain Measurement For strain measurement the items that have to be set for each input signal CH1 to CH16 include vertical scales sensor settings the bandwidth limit the display range the range unit trace settings waveform inversion and linear scaling To measure strain connect a strain measurement bridge bridgehead or a strain gauge transducer to the 701270 STRAIN NDIS or 701271 STRAIN DSUB strain module For information about how to connect a bridgehead see section 3 9 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 O3EN Waveform Display Display Labels Label Vertical Scale SCALE knob Setting the Sensor Sensor Setup Performing Strain Balancing Exec Balance Bandwidth Bandwidth Display Range Upper Lower Range Unit Range Unit Trace Settings Trace Setup nverted Waveform Display Invert Linear Scaling Linear Scale About Shunt Calibration Waveform Display Display Select whether to display each channel s input signal waveform ON Displays the waveform OFF Does not display the waveform Lab
208. menu to Average Record and set History to One P P Compression P P Comp When you save waveform data in binary format you can choose whether to use P P compression on it ON P P compression is used on the data before it is saved OFF The data is saved without being P P compressed Data Removal Interval Interval When you save data in ASCII format you can thin out the data before you convert it to ASCII format Set the data removal interval OFF no data is removed 5 points Per 5 10 points Per 10 20 points Per 20 50 points Per 50 100 points Per 100 200 points Per 200 500 points Per 500 1000 points Per 1000 2000 points Per 2000 5000 points Per 5000 For example if you select Per 5 the data will be removed as indicated below First data point 5 10 15 Time Information Time Info When you save data in ASCII format you can choose whether to save time information ON Time information is saved OFF Time information is not saved Extension Extension When you save data in ASCII format you can set the extension of the files that you save to csv or MATLAB 18 4 IM DL850 01EN 18 Saving and Loading Data Decimal Point Decimal Point When you save data in ASCII format you can choose how to separate the data Point Point The decimal point is a period and the separator is a comma Comma Comma The decimal point is a comma and the separator is a semicolon
209. modules installed in them the version number of the firmware installed on the module is also displayed Forthe 701265 Example 701265 A AA A AA is the version of the firmware installed on the module Forthe 701280 or 720240 Example 701280 B BB C CC B BB is the version of the firmware installed on the module C CC is the version of the firmware on the DL850 DL850V that can be installed on the 701280 FREQ If the two above versions are the same only one version number will be displayed Key Lock KEY PROTECT You can lock the operation keys to prevent unintentional changes to the current state of the DL850 DL850V When the keys are locked pressing any keys other than KEY PROTECT has no effect and the USB mouse and keyboard cannot be used P See here NUM LOCK Press this key to use the CH1 to CH16 keys to enter numbers After you press NUM LOCK you can press a channel key to enter the number sign unit prefix or exponent displayed to the upper right of the key in white or to confirm an entry or selection ENTER 20 10 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Appendix 1 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Integ1TY Sum of only the positive curve areas S1 S2 i g S2 1 1 1 e Integ2TY Sum of the positive and negative curve areas 81 S3 S2 777 S3 1 4 1 Mad a Integ1XY 1 Multiple Loops m e N 2 Non Closed Curve Stop point Area S n x So n The number of loops Start
210. modules whose firmware version is 1 2 or later Logic Boolean Factor Offset Configure these settings when the data type is set to Unsigned Signed or Float The DL850 DL850V uses the factor and offset values that you set here to convert extracted data to physical values Factor Scaling coefficient value per bit Offset Offset value Selectable range 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Unit Using up to 16 characters enter the unit to display for the waveform 2 40 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Loading a CAN Data Definition File Setup File Read You can configure the CAN data extraction conditions by loading a CAN data definition file an SBL file Data that has been edited using Symbol Editor is assigned to DL850V s sub channels 1 to 16 according to the order in the definition list the order can be changed as you like on the Symbol Editor s definition list An SBL file SBL extension is a CANdb file dbc extension that has been converted and edited into a physical value symbol definition file using YOKOGAWA s free Symbol Editor software You can obtain Symbol Editor from the YOKOGAWA website http www yokogawa com tm CANdb files dbc are signal definition database files created using the CANdb or CANdb software produced by Vector Informatik Sub Channels 1 to 16 Sub Channel 1 to 16 You can configure up to 60 sub channels on modules whose firmware version is 1 2 or later Configure the display label s
211. n Action Condition ActCondition Set the action condition to one of the settings below Always Always The actions are always performed The actions will be executed each time that the DL850 DL850V triggers Atfailure Fail The actions are executed when the specified GO conditions are not met Atsuccess Success The actions are executed when the specified GO conditions are met Sequence Sequence Select the sequence for executing actions Single Single Execution stops after the actions are performed once Continue Continue Actions are executed repeatedly However the actions stop repeating after the number of specified waveform acquisitions the Acquisition Count setting If Acquisition Count is set to Infinite the actions continue until waveform acquisition is stopped by the pressing of the START STOP key Acquisition Count Acquisition Count Set the number of waveform acquisitions Infinite Waveform acquisition continues until it is stopped by the pressing of the START STOP key 1to 65536 The DL850 DL850V stops waveform acquisition after it acquires the specified number of waveforms External Start Ext Start You can perform GO NO GO determination and output the results in sync with an external signal applied to the GO NO GO 1 O terminal of the DL850 DL850V OFF GO NO GO determination is not performed through the use of an external signal ON GO NO GO determination is performed through t
212. n increases as the record length gets larger the range varies depending on the record length 5 000 to 5 0099 div for 100 kpoint Range within which the cursors can be moved 4 5 div 0 5 div There are 10 points of measured data Cursor positions for 10 points of measured data 0 001 div 1 point of measured data Ir i i l l l l l l 5 000 div 4 991 div 0 000 div 0 009 div 5 000 div 5 009 div Range within which the cursors can be set Record length 10 kpoint 10010 points Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here IM DL850 01EN 9 11 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters The DL850 DL850V can automatically measure various parameters of the displayed waveform such as the maximum and minimum values It can also compute statistics for the automatically measured data Mode Settings Mode The following types of statistical processing are available for the automatically measured values of waveform parameters OFF Automated measurement is not performed Automated measurement of waveform parameters ON Automated measurement is performed Normal statistical processing Statistics Normal statistical processing is performed e Cyclic statistical processing Cycle Statistics Statistical processing is performed for each period cyclic statistical
213. n Examples The main display patterns are shown in the figure below Main Main Z1 225 lt W1 gt lt W2 gt lt FFT 1 gt or 21 gt lt 22 gt Wf lt FFT 2 gt W2 lt FFT 1 lt Z1 gt lt wi gt lt FFT 1 gt or lt FFT 2 lt Main gt lt Main gt lt Z1 gt lt FFT 1 gt lt Z1 gt or lt Z2 gt or or lt Z2 gt lt FFT 2 gt FFT 1 gt or lt FFT 2 FFT 1 lt W1 gt or lt FFT 2 gt lt FFT 1 gt lt w2 gt or lt FFT 2 gt Zoom1 and Zoom are abbreviated to Z1 and Z2 You can create patterns in which the main window is not displayed The dual capture window is also displayed as shown in the patterns above IM DL850 01EN 6 1 6 Display Display Format Format You can evenly divide the T Y waveform display window so that you can easily view input waveforms and computed waveforms You can set the number of divisions to one of the values listed below 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 or 16 O The number of displayed points in each division varies depending on the number of divisions Even if the number of displayed points changes the vertical resolution does not change The number of displayed points when only the Main window is displayed is as follows Divisions Displayed Divisions Displayed Divisions Displayed Divisions Displayed Points Points Points Points 328 points 3 218 points 4 164 points 82 points 12 54 points 16 41 points 1 656 points 6 109 points
214. n below f f fi f3 fa fo Nf X0 x1 x2 x3 X4 ee Xk ee Xn 4 Xn 3 Xn2 Xni Equations for First Order Derivatives Point xo fo a 25fo 48f1 36f2 16f3 3f4 Point x1 f E 3fo 10f1 18f2 6fs f4 Pointx2 f zf fo 8fi 8fs fi Point xk f ar fk 2 8fk 1 Bfk 1 fk 2 Point xn 2 fn oF fn 4 8fn 3 8fn 1 fn Point xn 1 fn i TF fn 4 6fn 3 18fn 2 10fn 1 3fn Point xn f ap 3fn 4 16fn 3 36fn 2 48fn 1 25fn h Ax is the sampling interval s example h 200 x 10 6 at 5 kHz Equations for Second Order Derivatives DDIF Point xo fo iar 35fo 104fi 114f2 56fs 11 HE E 7 Point x1 f Jane Li 1fo 20f1 6f2 4f3 fa Point x2 f zA fo 16f1 30f2 16f3 fa Point xx fe gAs fica 16fk1 30fk 16 fies fiez Point xn 2 fr 2 am Hint 16fn 3 30fn 2 16fn 1 fa Point xn 1 fn 1 fn 4 4fn 3 6fn 2 20fn 1 11 fn aN 2 N Point xn fn 1555 11fn 4 56fn 3 114n 2 104fn 1 35fn 12h2 IM DL850 01EN App 5 Appendix Integration INTG IINTG The first and second order integrated values are derived using the trapezoidal rule Equations for First Order Integration INTG Pointxo lo 0 Pointx 11 fo fih Pointxs lb T fo fih D thats Shi lah Pointxn In ln fret fo h Equations for Second Order Integration IINTG Point
215. nation Chatter Elimination For each bit you can set whether to eliminate chattering To eliminate chattering select an elimination time OFF 5msec 10msec 20msec 50msec 100msec Bit Mapping Bit Mapping Fixed Spaces are allocated for bits that are turned off Auto Spaces are not allocated for bits that are turned off Only the bits that are turned on are displayed The bits are displayed in order from the top Fixed When bit 7 is off Auto When bit 7 is off 2 36 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Zooming by Setting a Magnification V Zoom P See here Trace Settings Trace Setup P See here Note about Logic Measurement In the logic settings in the preferences you can set the display format Bit or Hex the cursor order and the bit order P See here IM DL850 01EN 2 37 2 Vertical Axis CAN Bus Signal Monitoring Applies to the DL850V You can monitor CAN bus signals using the CAN bus monitor module 720240 CAN bus signal monitoring is only available on the DL850V The module can be connected as a node to an ISO 11898 CAN bus The DL850V uses the module to read the data frames transferred on the CAN bus and then extracts the specified portion of the data field CAN data converts it to time series data and displays its waveform The module has two ports Up to 16 sub channel waveforms can be displayed for each port You can specify define the CAN data using Vector Informatik CANdb data
216. nce width is 1 V around the averaged waveform IM DL850 01EN 4 15 4 Triggering Cycle Frequency Cycle Frequency Set the trigger source frequency If the actually frequency is within 10 of the specified value it is automatically tracked Selectable range 40 to 1000 Hz The default setting is 50 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Reference Cycles Reference Cycle Select how many waveforms before the current waveform are used to create the real time templates When the sample rate is 500 kS s and the number of channels used to make real time templates is 9 or more you can only set the number of cycles to 2 Even if you select 4 cycles only two are used 1 One previous waveform is used 2 Two previous waveforms are used 4 Four previous waveforms are used Li If a surge or other abnormal waveform occurs in the reference cycle the abnormal waveform will be included in the averaged waveform so the DL850 DL850V will trigger on the next normal waveform This may make it appear is if the trigger has been delayed by a few cycles 4 Surge V Pre trigger section 1T Trigger occurrence When you use the wave window trigger we recommend that you set a pre trigger length that is longer than the reference cycle so that you can observe waveform abnormalities that occur in the reference cycle Sync Channel Sync Ch Select the channel used to detect the points at which waveform comparison for the wave wi
217. nd FFT menus When you change the settings in one menu the settings in the other menu are also changed On models that do not have user defined computation G2 option when you enter the FFT menu and turn FFT computation on the Math7 operators become invalid and Math7 cannot be used On models that do have user defined computation when you enter the FFT menu and set FFT 1 and FFT 2 to ON Math7 and Math8 cannot be used When you perform FFT computation on 50 kpoint or more of data using the FFT menu you cannot use computed waveforms 422 appears in the center of the top of the screen when FFT computation is being executed FFT analysis cannot be performed on waveforms stored through hard disk recording Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here IM DL850 01EN 12 5 13 GO NO GO Determination The DL850 DL850V determines whether the acquired waveform meets the reference condition GO result or not NO GO result When the DL850 DL850V produces a GO or NO GO result it executes the specified actions Mode Mode Set the method for GO NO GO determination OFF GO NO GO determination is not performed Waveform zone Wave Zone GO NO GO determination is performed using a waveform zone configured on the screen Waveform parameter Parameter GO NO GO determination is performed through the use of the specified waveform parameters Waveform Zone Wave Zone The DL850 DL850V returns GO NO GO results bas
218. nditions You can set the trigger source to an analog signal logic signal time external signal or power line signal Select the appropriate trigger source for the trigger type Trigger Level Trigger level refers to the signal level used as a reference for detecting a signal s rising and falling edges or high and low states With simple triggers such as the edge trigger the DL850 DL850V triggers when the trigger source level passes through the specified trigger level The range and resolutions that you can use to set the trigger level vary depending on the type of signal being measured Waveform Acquisition Based on the data that has been stored in the acquisition memory the DL850 DL850V performs various operations such as displaying waveforms on the screen computing measuring cursors and automatically measuring waveform parameters You can set the number of data points to store in the acquisition memory the record length enable or disable the sample data averaging feature and so on Record Length Record length refers to the number of data points that are stored to the acquisition memory for each channel Display record length refers to the data points from the data stored in the acquisition memory that are displayed on the screen Normally the acquisition memory record length and display record length are the same but the time axis setting may cause them to differ When you change the time axis setting the sample rate and record
219. ndow trigger starts and stops Select the synchronization channel by selecting Auto or a channel from CH1 to CH16 that has a module that the wave window trigger can be used with Auto Of the modules that the wave window trigger can be used with the module with the smallest number is automatically selected Level for detecting the start and end points The center of the amplitude of the sync channel signal measured for 0 5 seconds after the start of waveform acquisition Detection hysteresis Same as the edge trigger hysteresis gt See here CH1 to CH16 Select a channel whose module can be used with the wave window trigger If triggering does not function properly when you select Auto you can specify an appropriate channel For the selected channel you need to set the level for detecting the start and end points and set the detection hysteresis 4 16 IM DL850 01EN 4 Triggering Level for Detecting the Start and End Points Level and Detection Hysteresis Hysteresis If you set the sync channel to a channel from CH1 to CH16 you need to set the level for detecting the start and end points and set the detection hysteresis These items are the same as the trigger level See here and hysteresis See here of the simple trigger Trigger Hold Off Hold Off Trigger Position Position Trigger Delay Delay These items are the same as trigger hold off gt See here trigger position f See here and trigger delay P See
220. ne Bridge 1 Gauge Method If we assume V to be the voltage measured on the bridge and E to be the voltage applied to the bridge V 1 4 x E x AR R 4 From equation 3 AR R K x Thus V 1 4 XE X K x vce 5 When Determining the Strain e from the Measured Voltage V Using a Strain Gauge and the 1 Gauge Method If we derive e from equation 5 4 K x VIE esses 6 When Determining the Measured Value of the Strain Gauge Sensor e from the Voltage Measured on the Bridge V Strain Gauge Sensor Assuming e to be the measured value measured value of the strain gauge sensor mV V unit and substituting e in equation 6 e AIK x VIE sess 7 In the case of a strain gauge sensor set the gauge factor K to 2 on the DL850 DL850V If you change the value of K the values are converted through the use of the above equation App 12 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Appendix 4 Shunt Calibration of the Strain Module In shunt calibration the strain measurement gain is adjusted through the connection of a known resistance the resistance for shunt calibration hereinafter referred to as the shunt resistance in parallel to the strain gauge The strain module 701271 STRAIN DSUB supports shunt calibration with a built in shunt calibration relay circuit To perform shunt calibration you need a bridgehead that supports shunt calibration 70
221. ne of the above conditions is met and the pulse input is low the ratio is 0 if the pulse input is high the ratio is 100 When Measure Pulse is set to Negative if one of the above conditions is met and the pulse input is high the ratio is 096 if the pulse input is low the ratio is 10096 T Pulse period The output is set to 0 when a time equal to T x 4 or 20 s elapses after the last pulse was input Status when the condition is met Low L 0 when Measure Pulse is set to Positive 2 30 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis When Measuring Power Supply Frequency Center Frequency Setting Center Frequency Set the center frequency to 50 Hz 60 Hz or 400 Hz When Measuring Pulse Integration Unit Pulse Setting Unit Pulse You can set the physical amount per pulse to a value from 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Unit Setting Unit You can set the displayed pulse integration unit as necessary using up to four characters e Over Limit Reset Setting Over Limit Reset Select ON to reset the pulse count when the range is exceeded If you do not want to reset the pulse count select OFF The default setting is OFF Manual Reset Reset To manually reset the pulse count select Exec When Measuring Velocity Distance Pulse Setting Distance Pulse You can set the distance per pulse to a value from 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Time Unit Setting Time Unit You can set the unit of time to hour min or sec The output
222. nge2 you can automatically measure the first period after Time Range1 The method of determining the period is the same as the method for determining the Period measurement item In this mode after the period is determined the values of the measurement items related to voltage and area are computed This mode is effective for measurement items such as Rms or Avg that may result in errors depending on the measurement time period setting The measurements of time axis items and X Y areas are not affected OFF 1 cycle mode is disabled ON 1 cycle mode is enabled Measurement Time Period for Each Cycle Mode l cee i High 100 7T Distal line 90 EE ees ee area EVE POETES OEO EEA PEAR E 4 t 4 4 Mesial line 50 Proximal line 10 COE Low 0 1 Cycle lt OFF gt Time Range1 Time Range2 0 If the space between Time Range1 and Time Range2 is less than one period is displayed for the measured value Notes about Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Measurements cannot be made on a snapshot waveform or an accumulated waveform that is not the most recent waveform When an item is impossible to measure its measurement time period is greater than 100 Mpoint its measured value is displayed as The DL850 DL850V may not measure correctly if the waveform amplitude is small If there are two or more waveform periods within the m
223. nnenm eene 17 2 Saving and Loading Data Storage Media You Can Save and Load From sssssssses eee 18 1 SavingiBData Sawve uiis E toca pente tetro ashe ee ase E E IRSE ERA LEE RETE EL EXER t Eid pc eaa 18 2 Loading Data Load eee etti Ree ee ee tiene ERE ent eer Er e Reg Pn 18 7 File Operations Utility sirnana aii kaa e lb ioe oe biogr ose bebe denti dece 18 8 Ethernet Communication Network nisi gue zii EE 19 2 FTP Server FTP Web Server erect neret ehe trt radaas aaee Rn tren reet EE iania 19 3 Web Server FTP Web Server ierunt eo ek d ded eed HE de dene diede d ee 19 4 Maiil Mall em 19 5 IM DL850 01EN Contents Network Printer Net Print nei peter Pone cb roit eeu ee sre Fee Pao seb dank pneu 19 6 Network Drive Net Drive eee iieii diiad iieiea dnte tiad edate eder re enden edes 19 6 SNTP SNP 5n tont tte ee eee Ces OT dede eodd tee tte E E o dicc m iR Retina 19 7 20 Other Features Auto Setup Auto Setup inae etre etre teret dne i nx utere En EL DRM R a ede SE e ERE RAS 20 1 Initializing Settings Initialize eeseeeenm mme enn 20 1 Storing and Recalling Setup Data Setup Data Store and Recall ssesssse 20 2 Calibration GAL 4 3 metet ires er eit ette e EUR Re EI E ERU eee eee 20 2 Snapshot SNAP SHOT eem i eee eerie ire tegat e ege EO RC eode aaa 20 2 Clear Trace CLEAR T
224. number f you set auto naming to Date date and time the characters that you entered for the file name will not be used File names will only consist of the date information Comment Comment You can add a comment that consists of up to 120 characters when saving files You do not have to enter a comment All characters including spaces can be used in a comment Data Type Data Type Set the data type to binary ASCII or floating point Binary Binary The sampled data stored to the acquisition memory is saved to a file in binary format The extension is WDF A thumbnail file is also saved at the same time The thumbnail file can be viewed in the File Property Screen You can load the saved binary format data into the DL850 DL850V display the waveform of the data and view the values that it contains Accumulate is always set to OFF for loaded data f you save a waveform measured using the dual capture feature in binary format the main waveform data and captured waveform data are saved to the same file e ASCII ASCII The sampled data stored in the acquisition memory is converted using the specified range and saved to a file in ASCII format The extension is CSV You can use the file to analyze waveforms on your PC You cannot load the file into the DL850 DL850V Waveforms measured using the dual capture feature are saved simultaneously to separate main waveform data and captured waveform data files The capt
225. o Decke ce eben om U Page USB communication eeesseeeeeseeenenene 20 7 USB keyboard language sssssseenee 20 6 user defined computation ssssssssseeeee 11 4 V Page variables 5 eese areae crt eche xn roo deo dE sehn oet ETT 11 4 VGIOCILY E version update Loisa ferre erdt odere tee deve 20 9 vertical axis es 2 1 vertical cursors T Y waveforms wae 9 2 vertical cursors X Y waveforms sssssssss 9 7 Vertical position 3 iicet timer tg a ee vertical POSITION knob Vertical SCale ei m oerte oor pa aA voltage measurement sssssssseeneeeneen voltage measurement 16 CH module 2 16 volt ge scale 3 3 retener LER 2 3 W Page waveform acquisition ceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeesenaeeess 5 1 waveform area App 1 waveform arrangement sssssssssssseeeeen 6 3 waveform data loading sssssseeee waveform data saving 5 waveform display sss waveform display 16 CH module suss waveform display data point removal T Y waveforms 6 5 waveform display data point removal X Y waveforms 7 2 waveform parameters GO NO GO E waveform parameter search sssssssses waveforms searching ssessssssssee
226. o an input attenuator with a different attenuation You can change the scale in steps like this 1 V div gt 2 V div gt 5 V div Example Vertical position mark Ground level mark 4 div 1 000 V If 1 000 V div is changed to 0 500 V div 1 div 0 500 V Li While waveform acquisition is stopped turning the SCALE knob will not change the displayed waveform The changed V div value will be applied the next time that waveform acquisition is started While waveform acquisition is stopped turning the SCALE knob will not change the cursor measurement values or the automated measurement values of waveform parameters they will continue to be based on the V div value at the time of measurement Selectable range of V div The selectable range varies as shown below depending on the input module Input Module Selectable Range 701250 HS10M12 5 mV div to 20 V div 701251 HS1M16 1 mV div to 20 V div 701255 NONISO 10M12 5 mV div to 20 V div 701260 HV with RMS 20 mV div to 200 V div 701261 UNIVERSAL 5 mV div to 20 V div 5 mV div to 20 V div 701265 TEMP HPV 0 1 mV div to 10 V div 701275 ACCL VOLT 5 mV div to 10 V div 720210 HS100M12 10 mV div to 20 V div 720220 16CH VOLT 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF 200 mV d
227. o display waveforms to one of the options listed below 2k 100k Detailed Explanation P See here Li To zoom in or out on an X Y waveform change the upper and lower limits Upper and Lower of the channel that you want to zoom or change the vertical zoom V Zoom On voltage input modules to change the displayed position of an X Y waveform change the positions of the channels that it is based on 7 2 IM DL850 01EN 8 Zooming in on Waveforms You can magnify displayed waveforms along the time axis The zoomed waveforms of two locations can be displayed simultaneously the dual zoom feature You can also specify which channel you want to zoom in on You cannot zoom if the number of displayed points on the screen is less than or equal to 100 Example of the Dual Zoom Display box 2 o box 1 Main window Zoom1 window Zoom2 window IU Li If the Zoom1 or Zoom2 waveform window and the main waveform window Main are displayed at the same time a zoom box appears in the Main window so that you can check the zoom position Vertical Zoom You can magnify displayed waveforms along the vertical axis by using the menu that appears when you press a CH key P See here Zoom Window Display Display You can set whether to display each of the zoom windows Zoom1 and Zoom2 When a zoom window is displayed a zoom bar appears at the top of the screen This bar indicates what part of Main window is being
228. o perform cursor measurements on the main waveform on the DUAL CAPTURE menu turn the display of the dual capture window off Window OFF The results of measuring captured waveforms are displayed in italics Selectable Range of Cursor Positions In cursor measurements measurement is performed on the data stored in the acquisition memory not on the displayed data Because 1001 points along the time axis are used to display the waveform the number of acquired data points is equal to the set record length x 1 001 If the record length is set to 10 kpoint the number of acquired data points is 10010 Therefore if the record length is set to 10 kpoint there will be 10 points of measured data at the same position on the screen The cursor display position is normally within 5 div of the center of the waveform display window In this case if the cursor display position is set to 5 div from the center of the window only 1 point out of 10 points can be measured even if there are 10 points of measured data at the same time axis position For these kinds of situations the cursor position can be set in the range of 5 div to 5 009 div if the record length is set to 10 kpoint from the center of the window In other words you can measure the data at the right end of the waveform display window by setting the cursor position to a value in the range of 5 000 to 5 009 div from the center of the window Because the number of points at the same time axis positio
229. obtains using the 32 bit counter at 50 ns resolution to floating point format and determines period A using the following equation Period A Float Count value x 50 ns Computation Various computations are performed in floating point format based on the settings Example Frequency C float 1 A float Calculation of the 1 LSB Weight of the Output The 1 LSB weight of the output is determined from the range value div Because 1 div 2400 LSB 1 LSB weight of the output Value div 2400 Computation Output Conversion from Floating Point Values to 16 bit Binary Values When the Offset Is 0 When the offset value is 0 offset calculation is not performed and C float D float The data is converted into 16 bit binary data and written to the acquisition memory ACQ Memory 16 bit binary data E binary D float 1 LSB weight of the output Offset Computation When the offset value is not 0 the frequency module computes the offset value in floating point format using the following equation and then converts the value to 16 bit binary data D float C float offset value float In offset computation if the computed result C float is equal to the offset value the output is 0 If the computed result C float is less than the offset value E binary is negative IM DL850 01EN App 21 Appendix Filter Characteristics Time Delay of the Smoothing Filter The smoothing filter is a moving average filt
230. od Time Range to a value appropriate for the pulse that you want to measure When Pulse 3 tate eer EseT etaesus por 7T Distal line 90 eae aerate peciam su F1 Mesial line 50 etal are oer fe ba 4 Proximal line 10 Period T1 T2 Burst1 and Burst2 Burst period s Set the measurement time period Time Range to a value appropriate for the burst period that you want to measure fbf dy flee 4 fehl ed A f ff Distal line 90 seme TERRE FE F gBFBB d Fd f 4 Mesial line 50 ee MV t BEE ARLENE AE UE LEU Proximal line 10 Period T1 T2 Other Measurement Items When Trace Is Set to CH Sub Channel or Math Integ1TY Integ1 Area of the positive amplitude Integ2TY Integ2 Area of the positive amplitude area of the negative amplitude When Trace Is Set to XY Integ1XY Integ1 Total triangular area of the X Y waveform Integ2XY Integ2 Total trapezoidal area of the X Y waveform The names in parentheses are the measurement item names that appear when the measured values are displayed For detailed information about how the area of the X Y waveform is computed see Appendix 1 How Waveform Areas Are Calculated P See here All Clear All Clear You can turn off all the items for the waveform selected for Trace at once Copy Copy to You can copy the settings of the waveform selected for Trace to other traces You
231. omatically select appropriate unit prefixes The default setting is Auto The DL850 DL850V displays values in exponential notation if it is unable to display them as decimal numbers Scale Value Display You can display the linearly scaled values of the upper and lower vertical limits of each channel You can turn the scale value display on and off in the DISPLAY menu P See here Li Linear scaling cannot be performed for measurements of temperature or acceleration The following waveforms cannot be linearly scaled Accumulated waveforms except for the most recent You can configure linear scaling for each channel The specified scaling coefficient A and offset B are retained even after linear scaling is set to OFF Computations are performed on the linearly scaled values 2 14 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis RMS Measurement When the selected channel belongs to the 701260 HV with RMS you can observe the RMS values of the input signal AC RMS Use this setting when you only want to observe the RMS values of the input signal without the DC component Example When you measure the RMS values of a 2 Vpeak sine wave an approximately 1 4 VDC signal appears as shown in the figure on the right S Approx 1 4 V IH RMS values are calculated using the following equation T i u t dt u t Input
232. omputation varies depending on the window function Power spectrum density is used to compare power spectrums analyzed at different frequency bands However it is not necessary for signals having a line spectrum such as sine waves The DL850 DL850V can determine the following spectrums Item Expression Computation Magnitude PSD MAG PS MAG Af x k Log magnitude PSD LOGMAG 10 x logPS MAG Af x k Log magnitude reference 0 dB 1 Vrms Overall Value The overall value is the total RMS value determined from the frequency spectrum included in the signal The overall value is the square root of the summation of the power spectrums of all frequencies Overall value 27 PS rtm Vrms Rms overall value appears on the screen when automated measurement of waveform parameters is being performed MEASURE is set to ON on the channel that has been selected for power spectrum computation PS or PSD and Rms is set to ON However when Window is set to Exponential overall values are not displayed k k varies as indicated below depending on the selected time window Time Window Type k Rect rectangular window 1 Hanning hanning window 1 5 FlatTop flattop window 3 19693 Hamming hamming window 1 3628 App 8 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Cross Spectrum The cross spectrum is determined from two signals It is the product of the linear spectrum of one signal Gy and the complex conjugate Gx of the linear spe
233. on condition sequence and acquisition count and enable or disable synchronization with a remote signal Judgment Criterion Mode Select the judgment criterion from the following options X The condition is not used for GO NO GO determination N The DL850 DL850V returns a GO result when the source waveform is within the GO NO GO determination zone If even part of the source waveform is outside of the determination zone the DL850 DL850V returns a NO GO result OUT The DL850 DL850V returns a GO result when the entire source waveform is outside the GO NO GO determination zone If even part of the source waveform is inside the determination zone the DL850 DL850V returns a NO GO result Source Waveform Trace Set the waveform to use for GO NO GO determination to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 1 You can select the channel of an installed module However you cannot select the channel of a logic module 16 CH Voltage Input Module or CAN bus monitor module Zone Number Zone No Select the number of the waveform zone you want to use for GO NO GO determination from the range indicated below Zone 1 to zone 6 Zone1 to Zone6 Determination Logic Logic You can select the determination logic from the following options AND The actions are performed when all the conditions from 1 to 16 are met OR The actions are performed when a condition from 1 to 16 is met 13 2 IM DL850 01EN 13 GO NO GO Determinatio
234. on mode to one of the options below Normal Mode Normal Displays waveforms without processing the sampled data Envelope Mode Envelope The DL850 DL850V determines the maximum and minimum values among the data sampled at the maximum sampling rate for each module at a time interval that is twice the sampling period the inverse of the sample rate of Normal mode saves the values as pairs in the acquisition memory and uses the saved value pairs to display the waveforms This mode is effective when you want to avoid aliasing because the sample rate is essentially kept high regardless of the time axis setting It is also effective when you want to detect glitches narrow pulse signals or when you want to display the envelope of a modulated signal Normal mode Envelope mode Li When the dual capture feature is used captured waveforms cannot be displayed as envelope waveforms Box Average Mode BoxAverage This mode can be used with the 701250 HS10M12 701255 NONISO 10M12 and 720210 HS100M12 The DL850 DL850V determines the moving averages of the data sampled at the maximum sample rate saves them to the acquisition memory and uses them to display waveforms This mode is useful for removing small levels of noise from the input signal It is also useful for removing the noise from a single shot signal e 36 20 21 Input signal Voltage Time Box averaged Voltage a data Time 5 2 I
235. ord Start Record Waveform data is always loaded from the specified storage medium to record number 0 When there are multiple records the most recent waveform is placed in record number 0 and other waveforms are placed in order in record numbers 1 2 and so on Computation and automated measurement of waveform parameters are performed on the waveform of the record number specified by Selected Record You can analyze old data as long as you do not restart waveform acquisition and overwrite the contents of the history However when an averaged waveform is displayed Average Record you cannot recompute the data even if you change the record number The times that are listed are the waveform trigger times These times vary as indicated below depending on the trigger mode Trigger Mode Condition Time Displayed in the List Auto Auto Level Roll mode Stop time Single Roll mode no trigger Stop time On Start Start time When all the waveforms are displayed if a large number of records are selected it may take time for them to be displayed completely When the display is not complete want to stop the operation set Display Mode to 1 Record The history memory is cleared when you turn the power off ii appears in the center of the screen If you 16 6 IM DL850 01EN 17 Printing and Saving Screen Captures You can print screen captures from a built in printer option or a network printer save images to files and so on
236. orms statistical processing on the results of automated measurement The method used to determine the period in cyclic statistical processing is the same as the method used to determine the Period waveform parameter You can choose whether to determine the period for the selected waveform and use it on all source waveforms or to determine individual periods for each waveform Example in Which Cycle Trace Is Set to CH2 CH1 CH2 a b gt c Measures the items in ranges a b and c and calculates statistics on the items in the order a b and c The items of other channels are also measured in ranges a b and c If you select Own the items are measured over each waveform s period Measurement Items Measure Setup These items are the same as those for the normal statistical processing of automated measurement parameters P See here Li The following items are not measured For waveforms that are used in period determination Avg Frequency Avg Period Pulse pulse count Integ1XY area Integ2XY area Delay Forother waveforms Integ1XY area Integ2XY area Delay Measurement Time Period Time Range1 Time Range2 This setting is the same as the measurement time period setting for the automated measurement of waveform parameters P See here 10 8 IM DL850 01EN 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Cycle Trace Cycle Trace Selects the source waveform used to determine
237. ou can connect the DL850 DL850V as an FTP server to a network You can connect to the DL850 DL850V from a PC on the same network and retrieve waveform data P See here Web Server FTP Web Server You can connect the DL850 DL850V as a Web server to a network You can connect to the DL850 DL850V from a PC on the same network and monitor the DL850 DL850V display from the PC P See here Mail Mail The action on trigger or GO NO GO action can be set to mail transmission P See here Network Printer Net Print You can specify a network printer for printing screen captures P See here Network Drive Net Drive You can save waveform data and setup data to a network drive through an Ethernet connection P See here SNTP The DL850 DL850V clock can be set using SNTP The DL850 DL850V can be configured to automatically adjust its clock when it is turned on P See here O To connect a PC to the DL850 DL850V use a hub or router and connect to a network Do not connect a PC directly to the DL850 DL850V IM DL850 01EN 19 1 19 Ethernet Communication Optional TCP IP TCP IP Configure the settings that the DL850 DL850V needs to connect to a network DHCP DHCP is a protocol that temporarily allocates settings that a PC needs to connect to the Internet To connect to a network that has a DHCP server turn the DHCP setting on When DHCP is turned on the IP address can be automatically obtained when the DL850 DL850V is connected to a n
238. ough sampled data sampled at a high speed the shape of the the correct shape of the waveform may not be waveform is displayed displayed correctly Channels That Dual Capturing Is Performed On Normally dual capturing is performed on all the channels detected by the DL850 DL850V However under the following conditions dual capturing is only performed on channels whose displays are turned on When hard disk recording is enabled When an increase in the record length of the main waveforms places a limitation on the number of channels that can be used In both cases dual capturing is not performed on 16 CH Voltage Input Module sub channels whose input coupling is set to OFF Turning Dual Capturing On and Off Display Set whether to enable or disable dual capturing ON Dual capturing is enabled OFF Dual capturing is disabled IM DL850 01EN 5 7 5 Waveform Acquisition Main Waveform Acquisition Settings Time axis setting A value from 100 ms div to 3 days div P See here Main waveform sample rate 100 kS s or slower P See here Acquisition mode Normal Envelope or BoxAverage P See here Captured Waveform Acquisition Settings Capture Setup Time axis setting Time div A value from 1 us div to 500 ms div in 1 2 5 steps or 1 sec div to 1 min div Capture length Capture Length 5 kpoint 10 kpoint 25 kpoint 50 kpoint 100 kpoint 250 kpoint or 500 kpoint Capture mode Capture Mode A
239. ower switch on All settings except the date and time settings display on off setting will be reset and the setup data stored in internal memory will be reset to their factory default values If you reset the settings using this method the changes cannot be undone IM DL850 01EN 20 1 20 Other Features Storing and Recalling Setup Data Setup Data Store and Recall You can save up to three sets of setup data to specific internal memory areas It is convenient to save setup data that you use frequently You can save a set of setup data to one of the following numbers 1 2 3 By specifying these numbers you can store and recall setup data easily You can attach comments in the same way that you can when you save waveform data P See here Calibration CAL Executing Calibration Execute Calibration Calibrates following items Execute calibration when you want to make accurate measurements Vertical axis ground level Calibration is performed automatically when the power switch is turned on Notes about Calibration Allow the DL850 DL850V to warm up for at least 30 minutes before you execute calibration If you execute calibration immediately after power on the calibrated values may drift due to temperature changes or other environmental changes Execute calibration in a stable temperature environment ranging from 5 to 40 C 23 5 C recommended Donotapply signals when calibrating Calibration may not be executed prop
240. ping of hard disk recording the zoom display settings and the protect feature are valid The upper limit of the zoom factor during hard disk recording is the maximum zoom factor that can be displayed during hard disk recording During hard disk recording you cannot display history waveforms loaded waveforms or computed waveforms You can perform the following operations on data that has been recorded to a hard disk You cannot use the history feature Cursor measurement automated measurement of waveform parameters up to 100 Mpoint waveform zooming computation waveform data saving and loading printing During hard disk recording the DL850 DL850V may respond more slowly to operations The maximum number of files that can be saved to a single folder is 1000 Time Base Time Base Under the initial settings the DL850 DL850V samples the measured signals using the clock signal produced by its internal time base circuit internal clock You can also use an external clock signal to control sampling One data sample is stored to the acquisition memory at every pulse in the external clock signal The external clock input is useful when you want to monitor the waveform using a clock signal that is in sync with the signal being measured Apply the external clock signal to the external clock input terminal EXT CLK IN on the left panel For the specifications of the external clock input terminal see the getting started guide IM DL850 0
241. plate and triggers if the current waveform falls outside of the real time template Trigger Source You can select the trigger sources from CH1 to CH16 The modules that you can use as sources for the Wave Window trigger are listed below You cannot use other modules or temperature measurement channels as sources 701250 HS10M12 701251 HS1M16 701255 NONISO_10M12 701260 HV with RMS 701261 UNIVERSAL only voltage measurement 701262 UNIVERSAL AAF only voltage measurement 701270 STRAIN NDIS 701271 STRAIN_DSUB 701275 ACCL VOLT 720210 HS100M12 Template Channels Condition Select which trigger sources to use to make real time templates The DL850 DL850V triggers if the condition of even one of the channels is met ON Use OFF Don t use Tolerance Width Width To create a real time template for a channel set the distance from the averaged waveform of 1 2 or 4 cycles before the current waveform that will be tolerated The range within which you can set the distance varies depending on the type of signal being measured Signal Type Selectable Range Default Resolution Voltage 0 01 x the voltage scale to 10 x the voltage scale 0 01div Strain 1 uSTR to measurement range x 2 1u STR Same as the trigger level or 0 0005 mV V to measurement range x 2 0 0005mV V resolution f See here Acceleration 0 01 Unit to Unit div x 10 10mUnit For example when Width is set to 2V the tolera
242. pplied when you press BIND and then SET or when you turn on the DL850 DL850V the next time 19 2 IM DL850 01EN 19 Ethernet Communication Optional FTP Server FTP Web Server You can connect the DL850 DL850V as an FTP server to a network Set the user name and password that will be used by devices on the network to access the DL850 DL850V Also set the access timeout value User Name User Name Set the user name that will be used to access the DL850 DL850V from a PC The characters that you can use for the password are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard If you set the user name to anonymous you can connect to the DL850 DL850V without entering a password Password Password Set the password that will be used to access the DL850 DL850V from a PC The characters that you can use for the password are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard Timeout Timeout If an ftp connection cannot be established between the DL850 DL850V and the PC within the amount of time specified here the DL850 DL850V aborts the connection process Li To apply the settings that you specified press Entry FTP Server Overview When the DL850 DL850V is connected to the network as an FTP server the following features become available FTP Server From a PC you can view a list of files that are stored in the DL850 DL850V storage medium the internal memory or a storage medium that is connected to it and retrieve files PC Sy
243. processing e Statistical processing of history waveforms History Statistics Statistical processing is performed on history waveforms Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters ON The DL850 DL850V automatically measures the specified measurement items on the source waveform Measurement Items Measure Setup Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math8 XY1 to XY8 1 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it Measurement Item Item You can choose from the 28 measurement items and delay measurement items listed below The DL850 DL850V can store a total of up to 64000 data values for all waveforms CH1 through CH16 16chVOLT CAN and Math1 to Math8 A total of up to 32 measurement items can be displayed on the screen IM DL850 01EN 10 1 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Voltage Measurement Items Peak to Peak P P P P value Max Min V Amplitude Amp Amplitude High Low V Maximum Max Maximum voltage V Minimum Min Minimum voltage V High High vo
244. put linear spectrum while the phase shows the phase difference of the two Coherence Function The coherence function expresses the ratio of the output power generated by the input signal to the transfer system and the total output power Coherence function Gyx x Gyx Gxx x Gyy Item Expression Computation Phase CH MAG tan Ryx lyx2y Gxx x Gyy If the output signal is due entirely to the input signal the coherence function becomes 1 As the ratio decreases it falls below 1 Thus the coherence function always takes on a value between 0 and 1 Li On one data acquisition the coherence function becomes 1 across all frequencies Make sure to take the frequency average of the computation IM DL850 01EN App 9 Appendix Time Windows You can use a rectangular Hanning flattop or exponential time window you can only use an exponential time window on models with the user defined computation option The rectangular window is suited to transient signals such as impulse waves which attenuate completely within the time window The Hanning and flattop windows allow continuity of the signal by gradually attenuating the parts of the signal located near the ends of the time window down to the 0 level Hence they are suited to continuous signals The Hanning window provides a higher frequency resolution compared to the flattop window However the flattop window has a higher level of accuracy When the waveform being analyze
245. r cursors T Y waveforms sssssssssss 9 4 marker cursors X Y waveforms sssssssssee 9 8 measurement items measurement resolution ni memory test iiic peint iere TENE SEINES menu area display switching ssesseessesss 6 6 mesial message format CAN cceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeees N network drive nere eee ea e i a grada network printes 5 rr nere rentas numeric monitor iu NUM LOCK x iae E ite e iste eee leo eed O Page one shot output operators 2 OR trigger i eren et vito HE e RE 4 11 Mp DATE P P1 P2 linear scaling setting peak computation pealceurSOLs siete eee eese s ee pen marker 1 cete e nodo eec paca d xe Ree dun die period a P tiod trigger 2 ee Ae ae phase Tuhction coe tae eae ia ne phase Shift ennnen a d LLENAS port niumbers uui eren i e ha need power on action performed at power Spectrum certes power supply frequency printer test probe attenuation proximal PUI Up ities sendia tec AA TAANE KE EESAN pulse averaging monier eed lini aa e be Een pulse integration pulse width pulse width computation t Pulse Width trigger sesssssesseeeeeeeee R Page read
246. r details see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Record Length and Sample Rate in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN When an External Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base Selectable range record length 2 points to record length 2 points Step 1 IM DL850 01EN 11 3 11 Computation Scaling Mode Scaling Mode Set the method used to set the vertical display range of computed waveforms to one of the following options Auto The upper and lower limits are set automatically Manual The upper and lower limits must be set manually Upper and Lower Limits Upper Lower Set the upper and lower limits when Scaling Mode is set to Manual The selectable range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Start Point and End Point Start Point and End Point Set the range of computation by specifying a computation start and end point The default settings are 5 div and 5 div The maximum range from the computation start point to the computation end point varies as indicated below depending on the number of computations One computation Up to 1 Mpoint Two computations Up to 500 kpoint Three or four computations Up to 250 kpoint Five to eight computations Up to 125 kpoint The computation range points are similar to the settable range of the cursor display position in cursor measurement For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions P See here Li An icon appears in the cente
247. r of the top of the screen when computations are being executed User Defined Computation Optional You can perform user defined computation on models with the G2 option Operator Operation Select User Define Expression Expression user defined Create an expression by combining computation source waveforms variables constants functions and operators Computation Source Waveforms and Variables You can use the following waveforms and variables Menu Item Description C1 to C16 Waveforms from CH1 to CH16 Cn 1to Cn 16 The waveforms of sub channels 1 to 16 on a 16 CH Voltage Input Module n 7 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Cn 1to Cn 16 The waveforms of sub channels 1 to 16 on a CAN Bus Monitor Module You can configure up to 60 sub channels on modules whose firmware version is 1 2 or later n 13 to 16 If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it M1 to M7 Math waveforms T Total number of data points in the time direction Li When computation is performed on a linearly scaled channel the scaled values are used 11 4 IM DL850 01EN 11 Computation Operators and Functions You can use the following operators and functions Menu Item Example Description Tons C1 C2 Displays the result of performing basic arithmetic on two specified waveforms SHIFT SHIFT C1 Displays the result of shifting the specified waveform s phase ABS ABS M1 Displays th
248. r2 H Cursor1 and H Cursor2 to move the cursors Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the cursors within the range of 5 to 5 div in steps of the following sizes for horizontal cursors 0 01 div for vertical cursors Time div x 10 display record length Measurement Items Item Setup You can measure the following horizontal and vertical values at the cursor positions Horizontal Axis X1 Time value at V Cursor1 X2 Time value at V Cursor2 AX Difference between the time values of V Cursor1 and V Cursor2 1 AX Reciprocal of the difference between the time values of V Cursor1 and V Cursor2 Vertical Axis Y1 Vertical value of H Cursor1 Y2 Vertical value of H Cursor2 AY Difference between the vertical values of H Cursor1 and H Cursor2 Marker Cursors Marker T Y waveforms Four markers are displayed on the selected waveform You can measure the level at each marker the amount of time from the trigger position to each marker and the level and time differences between markers Marker1 Marker3 Marker2 Marker4 Markers Marker1 through 4 Select the markers from Marker1 to 4 that you want to display You can assign each marker to a different waveform 9 4 IM DL850 01EN 9 Cursor Measurement Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below OFF Disables the marker CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1
249. rawing Waveforms The DL850 DL850V can expand zoom the waveform horizontally When the zoom factor of the waveform is increased the number of displayed points decreases The DL850 DL850V displays the waveform using P P compressed until the number of displayed points falls to 2002 but it cannot display the waveform using continuous lines when the number of displayed points falls below 1001 When this happens the DL850 DL850V interpolates the display data so that the number of displayed points is 1001 Dot Display Under the initial settings display interpolation is performed automatically but you can also disable display interpolation set it to OFF and display the waveform using dots When interpolation is disabled up to 2002 points or 100100 points whichever is selected of all the acquired data are displayed without P P compression For example if the number of displayed points is set to 100 kpoint and the display record length is 10 kpoint the number of acquired data points is 10010 points the DL850 DL850V draws all the points of the waveform by aligning 10 points vertically at the same time axis position If the number of acquired data points exceeds 2002 or 100100 to display the waveform the DL850 DL850V reduces the amount of data to 2002 or 100100 points whichever is selected by removing the data between displayed points Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Record Length and Sample Rate If you change the time axis settin
250. rform an FFT phase shift pulse width or binary conversion computation on the computed results of an expression such as C1 C2 create expressions like these M1 C1 C2 M2 PS MAG M1 Unit Unit Label Label and Turning the Display On and Off Display These settings are the same as those for basic arithmetic P See here Scaling Mode Scaling Mode Upper and Lower Limits Upper Lower and Start and End Points Start Point End Point P See here 11 6 IM DL850 01EN 11 Computation Averaging Settings Average Setup user defined You can average and compute the peak values of the results of user defined computation Averaging Modes Average Mode The following types of averaging are available OFF Averaging is not performed Linear averaging Linear Values are averaged linearly Exponential averaging Exp Values are averaged exponentially Cycle averaging Cycle Values are averaged across cycles Peak computation Peak Peak values are computed Linear Averaging Linear The number of values specified by the average count are added and divided by the average count and the resulting values are used to display the waveform For the equation see the equation for linear averaging in Averaging Mode Average Domain Average Domain Select what to average Time A time domain waveform is averaged Freq Afrequency domain waveform is averaged Linear Count Linear Count Set the average coun
251. rs when the measured values are displayed is Delay If Mode is set to Degree and Reference is set to Trigger the measured value is displayed as Detail Parameter Detail Parameter Set the reference level that is used to measure various parameter values such as the rise and fall times for each measurement source waveform Distal Mesial and Proximal Unit Setting Mode Set the method for setting the three levels that are used as references in the measurement of various parameter values such as the rise and fall times You can set the distal mesial and proximal values as percentages of the specified trace CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN or Math1 to Math8 The high value of the specified trace is equal to 100 and the low value is equal to 096 Unit You can set the distal mesial and proximal values of the specified trace CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN or Math1 to Math8 by specifying physical values such as voltages or temperatures Distal Mesial and Proximal Settings Distal Mesial Proximal You can set the distal mesial and proximal values Selectable range 0 0 to 100 0 in 0 1 steps or voltage or temperature values that correspond to 10 div the steps that you can set voltage and temperature values in vary depending on the module See Range of V div High Low Specification Method High Low The high and low levels are the 10096 and 096 levels used to measure various parameter values such as
252. s value at Cursor2 AY Difference between the vertical Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Vertical Cursors Vertical Two dashed lines vertical cursors appear on the vertical axis You can measure the horizontal X axis value at the position of each vertical cursor and measure the level difference between the vertical cursors Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below XY1 to XY8 Moving the Cursors Cursor1 Cursor2 Use Cursor1 and Cursor2 to move the cursors Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the cursors within the range of 5 to 5 div in 0 01 div steps IM DL850 01EN 9 7 9 Cursor Measurement Measurement Items Item Setup You can measure the following horizontal X axis values at the cursor positions x1 Horizontal X axis value at Cursor1 X2 Horizontal X axis value at Cursor2 AX Difference between the horizontal X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Horizontal and Vertical Cursors H amp V You can display the horizontal and vertical cursors simultaneously and measure vertical Y axis and horizontal X axis values Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below XY1 to XY8 Moving the Cursors V Cursor1 V Cursor2 H Cursor1 H Cursor2 Use V Cursor1 V Cursor2 H Cursor1 and H Cursor2 to move the cursors Taking the center of the waveform
253. s ignored Cycle averaging cannot be performed on an FFT waveform Cycle Averaging Example When the record length is 10 kpoint the cycle count is 720 the computation start point is 5 000 div and the computation end point is 5 000 div 10 k 720 13 88 13 cycles are used for the computation 13x720 9360 The data from the computation start point point 1 to point 9360 is included in the cycle average computation 11 8 IM DL850 01EN 11 Computation Peak Computation Peak The maximum value at each point of the computed data is determined and the resulting values are used to display the waveform For each computation the new computed value is compared with the past value and the larger value is kept IRTHI 23 DOERAT 3 sets of FFT data MATHE 14D 00800 9 oor 2 5007 RTHI gt 20 OOWEFOO WRTHI 20 DONEFOO SG ee oe eae ete To MATHE 140 00E 00 MATHE 2140 00E 00 0 Dang 2 Somes 0 ours 2 00 pera anonte The maximum values of each point are displayed MATHE 2140 00E 00 0 ours Li The DL850 DL850V normally performs scaling by using the computed data at the beginning auto scaling For coherence functions and in other cases where the amplitude of the averaged waveform changes significantly use manual scaling When you execute averaging after measurement is stopped computation cannot be restarted However computation can be restarted if the number o
254. source waveform and the upper and lower threshold levels Up and Lo IM DL850 01EN 11 Computation Constants Menu Item Description K1 to K8 P See here 0 to 9 Exp E notation Selectable range 30 to 30 Use this constant to enter values in E notation 1E 3 1000 2 5E 3 0 0025 It is displayed as E in expressions to distinguish it from the EXP operator Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Measure You can use the automated measurement values of waveform parameters in expressions The DL850 DL850V cannot retrieve waveform parameter values when the display of the measurement source waveform is off Combinations of Operators That Are Not Allowed An expression cannot be used in another expression with a smaller number Example Math5 M6 M3 Expressions containing only constants K1 to K8 are not allowed Example Math5 K1 K8 An expression can only contain up to two FILT1 or FILT2 functions Example FILT1 C1 FILT1 C2 FILT1 C3 A single FFT expression can only contain one operator Example PS MAG C1 C2 Additional computations cannot be performed on FFT results Example PS MAG C1 C2 Additional computations cannot be performed on pulse width computations Example PWHH C1 C2 Only one operator can be used in a single phase shift computation pulse width computation or binary conversion expression Example SHIFT C1 C2 BIN C1 C2 PWHH C1 C1 If you want to pe
255. start and end points Start Point and End Point The default settings are 5 div and 5 div Selectable range 5 div to 5 div The start and end points are similar to the settable range of the cursor display position in cursor measurement For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions P See here Executing a Search Execute The DL850 DL850V searches for positions where the specified search conditions are met Then the DL850 DL850V displays the waveforms expanded in the zoom window with the detected point that corresponds to the number you specify at the center Up to 1000 points can be detected Edge Search Determination If the peak is below the upper limit of the hysteresis immediately after a rising edge or above the lower limit of the hysteresis immediately after a falling edge the DL850 DL850V will not count the edge This rising edge is determined to be false Point of detection Upper hysteresis 4 44 5 fed PL value eee f gt Specified level Lower hysteresis j ME WEE tae EE maces nae US value E When the search condition is set to Search start position two rising edges IM DL850 01EN 15 3 15 Searching Waveforms Event Search Event You can search for an event number that was assigned during measurement Event Number Select Number Select the event number that you want to search for You can select a number from 1 to 100 Searched Wavefor
256. stem Requirements PC A PC running Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Mac OS X OS Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Mac OS X 10 4 8 Internal memory 512 MB or more recommended Communication ports 100BASE TX or 1000BASE T Ethernet port Use this port to connect the PC to the network Display A display compatible with any of the above operating systems and with a resolution of 1024x768 or higher Mouse or pointing device Mouse or pointing device compatible with any of the above operating systems Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 Firefox 3 0 or Safari 3 2 1 IM DL850 01EN 19 3 19 Ethernet Communication Optional Web Server FTP Web Server You can connect the DL850 DL850V as a Web server to a network Set the user name and password that will be used by devices on the network to access the DL850 DL850V Also set the access timeout value User Name User Name Set the user name that will be used to access the DL850 DL850V from a PC The characters that you can use for the password are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard If you set the user name to anonymous you can connect to the DL850 DL850V without entering a password Password Password Set the password that will be used to access the DL850 DL850V from a PC The characters that you can use for the password are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard o To apply the settings that you specified press Entry Web Server Overview When
257. sured waveform can be found The power spectrum and cross spectrum can also be determined from the linear spectrums of one or two signals Because the FFT is a complex function the linear spectrum produces the real part and imaginary part of the frequency components The magnitude and phase of the linear spectrum can also be determined from this result The DL850 DL850V can determine the following spectrums Item Expression Computation Real part LS REAL R Imaginary part LS IMAG l Magnitude LS MAG R Log magnitude LS LOGMAG 20 x log R Phase LS PHASE tan I R Log magnitude reference 0 dB 1 Vpeak IM DL850 01EN App 7 Appendix Power Spectrum The power spectrum expresses the power squared value of each frequency component included in the measured signal It is determined by taking the product of the linear spectrum and its complex conjugate It does not contain phase information The DL850 DL850V can determine the following spectrums Item Expression Computation Magnitude PS MAG DC component R AC component R 122 Log magnitude PS LOGMAG DC component 10 x log R 12 AC component 10 x log R 12 2 Log magnitude reference 0 dB 1 Vrms Power Spectrum Density The power spectrum density expresses the power spectrum per unit frequency It is determined by dividing the power spectrum by the frequency resolution Af found during the analysis of the power spectrum The c
258. t When the range unit is STR 30000 STR When the range unit is mV V x15 mV V For the 701275 ACCL VOLT the range of the upper and lower limits is 2000000 units For the 701280 FREQ the range of the upper and lower limits is offset Value div x 30 When measuring frequencies 1500 kHz to 1700 kHz When measuring revolutions in rpm 300 krpm to 350 krpom When measuring revolutions in rps 5000 rps to 7000 rps When measuring periods 150 s to 200 s When measuring duty ratios 500 to 700 When measuring pulse widths 150 s to 200 s When measuring pulse integration 2 5E 22 to 2 5E 22 When measuring velocity 2 5E 22 to 2 5E 22 Li The displayed V div will not change if you turn the SCALE knob after you set the upper and lower limits but the measurable range will change If you change the measurable range so that it is narrower than the range of the set upper and lower limits when you start waveform acquisition the parts of the waveform that do not fit within the measurable range may not appear The measurable range is approximately 10 div with O in the center when V Scale is set to DIV 2 10 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Offset Offset By adding an offset you can move the waveform to a vertical position that is easier to see For example when measuring a signal with a fixed voltage component you can use the offset to cancel out the fixed voltage and measure the signal changes at a higher voltage
259. t Selectable range 2 to 128 in 2 steps Exponential Averaging Exp Using the specified attenuation constant the DL850 DL850V attenuates the influence of previous computed data to produce averaged values and uses the results to display the waveform For the equation see the equation for exponential averaging in Averaging Mode Average Domain Average Domain P See here Attenuation Constant Average Weight Set the attenuation constant Selectable range 2 to 256 in 2 steps IM DL850 01EN 11 7 11 Computation Cycle Averaging Cycle The data from the computation start point to the computation end point is divided into the number of data points Cycle Count that is specified as being a single cycle and equivalent points in each divided cycle are averaged with each other The resulting values are used to display the waveform The figure below shows the results of cycle averaging when Cycle Count is set to 720 Computed Data 45 724 4 725 5 1 cycle P 1 cycle Jot Cycle Averaging Results Equivalent points in each divided cycle are linearly averaged and the resulting values are used to display the waveform 720 1440 Zan Cycle Count Cycle Count Set the number of data points in one cycle Selectable range 10 to 1800 Li All the data between the computation start and end points can be computed If the data cannot be divided evenly by the specified cycle count the remaining data i
260. t WD Cursor 1 Cursor 2 E o i GN j Wiis p ub 3B ae LLLI Lo T LCN j Lf Lf LLLI Lf vL When Some Bits Are Turned Off Cursor 1 Cursor 2 i When the cursor order is 1 gt 8 Bit Y1 01001010 Y2 10110010 Hex Y1 4A Y2 B2 When the cursor order is 8 21 Bit Y1 01010010 Y2 01001101 Hex Y1 52 Y2 4D When the cursor order is 1 58 Bit Y1 01 01 10 Y2 10 10 10 Hex Y1 16 Y2 2A When the cursor order is 8 51 Bit Y1 01 10 10 Y2 01 01 01 Hex Y1 1A Y2 15 In the logic settings in the preferences you can set the display format Bit or Hex the cursor order Cursor Order and the bit order Bit Order P See here IM DL850 01EN 9 Cursor Measurement Horizontal and Vertical Cursors H amp V T Y waveforms Displays the horizontal and vertical cursors simultaneously Measurement Source Waveform Trace Set the measurement source waveform to one of the waveforms below CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math8 1 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it Moving the Cursors V Cursor1 V Cursor2 H Cursor1 H Cursor2 Use V Cursor1 V Curso
261. t is used to check for the trigger condition You can set the source waveform to one of the waveforms below Analog Signal CH1 to CH16 Select a channel from CH1 to CH16 to use the analog signal being applied to the corresponding terminal as the trigger source CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN 1 You can select the channel of an installed module 2 If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel However you cannot select a sub channel whose Input setting is set to OFF gt See here Logic Signal Bit 1 to Bit 8 Select a bit from 1 to 8 to use the logic signal being applied to the port of a logic input module as the trigger source When a logic input module is installed in a slot bits 1 to 8 appear as options below the channel that corresponds to that slot CH1 to CH16 Time Time Select Time to use the date and time as the trigger source The trigger occurs at the specified date and time and at specified intervals afterwards Specify the year month day hour minute and second You can select one of the time intervals listed below 10sec 15sec 20sec 30sec 40sec 50sec 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 7min 8min 9min 10min 15min 20min 25min 30min 40min 45min 50min 1hour 2hour 3hour 4hour 5hour 6hour 7hour 8hour 9hour 10hour 11hour 12hour 18hour 24hour
262. tance shunt resistance you want to derive R Combined resistance when the relay is turned on R R Rs E bridge power supply IM DL850 01EN App 17 Appendix Calculation Example When Determining the Shunt Resistance Rs from the Strain s Given a gauge factor K of 2 Detailed equation equation B Rs R x 1 2 x 6 General equation equation A Rs R x 1 2 x 2 x 7 Degree of error of 1 to 2 Desired Strain Rs Value Q Derived from Rs Value Q Derived from the Detailed Equation 6 the General Equation 7 g USTR R 1200 R 3500 R21200 R 350Q 1 000 59 940 174 825 59 880 174 650 2 000 29 940 87 325 29 880 87 150 5 000 11 940 34 825 11 880 34 650 10 000 5 940 17 325 5 880 17 150 When Determining the Strain from the Shunt Resistance Rs If we derive from equations 6 and 7 Detailed equation equation B 1 1 2 x RS R sensen 8 General equation equation A 1 2 x 1 Rs R 9 Degree of error of 1 to 2 When the Bridge Resistance R is 120 Q RS Value Q Strain uSTR Derived from Strain uSTR Derived from the Detailed Equation 8 the General Equation 9 60 000 999 998 30 000 1 996 1 992 12 000 4 975 4 950 6 000 9 901 9 804 e When the Bridge Resistance R is 350 Q RS Value Q Strain uSTR Derived from Strain uSTR Derived from the Detailed
263. ted In waveform accumulation older waveforms remain on the screen for a period of time that is longer than the waveform update period so that older waveforms remain while new waveforms continue to appear The specified number of accumulated waveforms are displayed with gradually decreasing intensity ON Waveforms are accumulated OFF Waveforms are not accumulated Count Count Set the number of accumulated waveforms to display Waveforms will accumulate infinitely if you choose Infinite Selectable range 2 to 128 waveforms in 2 steps The default setting is 16 Clearing Accumulated Waveforms You can clear accumulated waveforms by pressing the CLEAR TRACE key Li Automated measurement of waveform parameters and GO NO GO determination are performed on the most recent waveform f you press START STOP to stop waveform acquisition accumulation stops When you restart waveform acquisition accumulation resumes from the condition that it was in when it was stopped The built in printer does not show the intensity differences between accumulated waveforms When Accumulate is set to ON you cannot change the settings of the history feature When Accumulate is set to ON even if you change the display format the waveforms that are currently on the screen are not cleared To clear waveforms press CLEAR TRACE You cannot set accumulate to ON in the roll mode display When you set accumulate to OFF the accumulated wave
264. ters 10 1 auto naming auto scroll auto setup oet Lon Rib RIMIS averaging computation essen averaging mode AX B linear scaling setting B background color 3 cde deed e oe balaticilig si5 ise REIP bandwidth basic arithmetic bias Binary epe eb p aad p ee ea e b EA binary conversion essssssssssseeeeeeeeneeen nenne bit data display order i bit mappling 2 eicere eee etin eee Bittate CAN hii AED tes box average miode iene asd eee a ae bridge voltage ee ere DUE DOUL rre rae t ra ET QR rU pne FER ANA ds C Page Calibration sedeo ee E 20 2 CAN bus signal monitoring eeseeseeeeee 2 38 captured waveform display number sssssss 5 8 chattering clear ACG M M 20 2 e o i r oo tM 20 9 coherence function essen App 9 combine display sssessssseeeeeeeenneeenne 7 2 comment 18 3 communication interfaces types of 20 3 COMPUTATION 2 teet ecu er e A DOE 11 1 constants 2 rdiet ETE tnd Meher mata arable 11 6 COPY AEREE 2 43 Cross spectrum sssse App 9 current to voltage conversion ratio sssssusss 2 7 cursor measuremient ceret reet nes 9 1 cursor types FFT waveforms 9 9 cursor types T Y waveforms
265. test extent possible within the settable range the maximum and minimum values are used to set the upper and lower limits of all sub channels Frame Formats Data Frames Standard format Data Frame Arbitration Field Control Field Data Field i CRC Field iACK d ial tt z lt gt x a Recessive S Z 2 2 5 2Z DLC Dat crc 2 2 3leor ID 28 18 E 3 0 ae Sequence amp 2 2 ML Dominant 1 11 111 4 as8N 0sNs8 15 111 7 Extended format Data Frame x Arbitration Field iControl Field Data Field CRC Field ACK gt lt Pik gt lt gt lt gt o gt az DLC CRC 83 65 AA m S ID 28 18 95 ID 17 0 E Data 2 2 8 EOF e am wm S S 3 0 Sequence 2 2 1 11 1 1 18 111 4 8N OsNss8 15 111 7 Remote Frames Standard format P Remote Frame 1 Arbitration Field i Control Field CRC Field ACK a ES is ze gt Recessive 5 8 o A SIRIS ID28 18 Al5 g 2 i 2 EOF m amo Sequence 8 6 amp Domi i zii Dominan 1 11 111 4 15 111 7 Extended format Remote Frame Arbitration Field iControl Field CRC Field ACK lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt ae 2 3 s o o Am CRC 2 EOF ID 28 18 O ID170 E 0 9 am 3 SIS 3 0 Sequence o a 4 7j2 1 11 1 1 18 111 4 15 111 7 Li Motorola s Forward format setting is not supported 2 42 IM DL850 0
266. thX 1 as the computation source waveform You cannot use another computation waveform as the computation source waveform for Math1 Li When computation is performed on a linearly scaled channel the scaled values are used Unit Unit You can assign a unit of up to four characters in length to the computed results The specified unit is reflected in the scale values Label Label You can create a label of up to eight characters in length The labels that you create are displayed on the screen Turning the Display On and Off Display Select whether to display the computed waveform e ON Displays the computed waveform OFF Does not display the computed waveform Binary Conversion Bin S1 Using the specified threshold levels you can convert the waveform assigned to Source to a digital waveform Computation Source Waveform Source Unit Unit Label Label and Turning the Display On and Off Display These settings are the same as those for basic arithmetic P See here Upper and Lower Thresholds Thr Upper Thr Lower Set the upper and lower threshold values All values above the upper threshold on the computation source waveform are converted to ones and all values below the threshold are converted to zeros 11 2 IM DL850 01EN 11 Computation Power Spectrum PS 1 Performs
267. the rise and fall times You can choose one of the following methods for setting the high and low levels Auto The DL850 DL850V sets the high value to the high amplitude level and the low value to the low amplitude level based on the voltage level frequency of the waveform in the measurement time period while taking into account the effects of ringing spikes etc This method is suitable for measuring square waves and pulse waves Max Min The DL850 DL850V sets the high and low values to the maximum and minimum values in the measurement time period This method is suitable for measuring sinusoidal and saw waves It is not suitable for waveforms that have ringing and spikes Measurement Time Period Time Range1 Time Range2 Set the measurement time period using two vertical cursors The position of the thin dashed line Time Range1 is the measurement start point The position of the thick dashed line Time Range2 is the measurement end point The number of data points in the measured waveform can be up to 100 Mpoint from the measurement start point The measurement time period is similar to the selectable range of the cursor display position in cursor measurement For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions gt See here IM DL850 01EN 10 5 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 1 Cycle Mode 1 Cycle Mode Instead of automatically measuring the measurement time period specified by Time Range1 and Time Ra
268. the clock signal of the waveform that is being measured Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Record Length and Sample Rate If you change the time axis setting the sample rate and the acquisition memory record length also change For details see appendix 1 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN Sample Rate If you change the time axis setting the sample rate also changes The sample rate is the number of samples per second S s When the sample rate is low compared to the frequency of the input signal the high frequency components of the waveform are misread as low frequency components To prevent the high frequency components from being misread sample the signal at the highest sample rate possible or set the waveform acquisition mode to Envelope IM DL850 01EN 1 Main Features Roll Mode Display When the trigger mode is set to Auto Auto Level Single or On Start and the time axis setting is greater than or equal to 100 ms div instead of updating waveforms through triggering update mode the DL850 DL850V displays the waveforms in roll mode In roll mode waveforms scroll from right to left as new data is captured and the oldest values are deleted from the screen Trigger A trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen A trigger occurs when the specified trigger condition is met and a waveform is displayed on the screen Trigger Modes The trigger mode determines the conditions for updating th
269. the inverted waveforms Even when inverted waveforms are displayed triggering is based on the uninverted waveforms When you are measuring strain you cannot invert waveforms whose measurement has finished The inversion setting will be applied when the next measurement starts 2 12 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Linear Scaling Linear Scale Linear scaling is a function that converts measured values into physical values and reads them directly When you measure voltage current strain or frequency revolutions periods duty ratios power supply frequencies pulse widths pulse integration velocities you can choose from one of two linear scaling methods AX B or P1 P2 Linear Scaling Modes Scaling Mode OFF Linear scaling is not performed AX B Using specified scaling coefficient A and offset B the DL850 DL850V performs the following computation to scale cursor measurement values and automated measurement values of waveform parameters You can specify the unit of the linearly scaled results Y AX B X Value before scaling Y Value after scaling Selectable range for A and B 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Initial value of A 25 000E 00 Initial value of B 25 000E 00 P1 P2 You can specify two measured values P1 X P2 X and specify a scale value P1 Y P2 Y for each The scale conversion equation y 7 ax b is determined by these four values Measured value P1 X P2 X range Same as the measurement ran
270. the period CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math to Math8 The period of the specified waveform is applied to all waveforms 1 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it Own A period is determined for each source waveform However if signals that have different periods are applied to multiple channels the number of iterations of automated measurement and statistical processing for each signal is equal to the number of periods in the slowest signal CH1 CH2 CH3 o Statistical processing is performed in periods that are determined in order from the oldest data of the displayed waveform It cannot be used at the same time as 1 cycle mode Execution of Measurement Execute Measure When Cycle Trace Is Set to Own d Statistically processed cycles 4 n Statistically processed cycles Statistically processed cycles The number of cycles in the channel with the slowest cycle CH3 is four so statistical processing is performed on the four oldest cycles of the data for CH1 and CH2 The remaining data is not used for statistical process
271. the physical value P1 P2 The DL850 DL850V determines the scale conversion equation y 7 ax b using four values that you specify two measured values P1 X P2 X and the value that each one should be converted to P1 Y P2 Y The DL850 DL850V scales values using the scale conversion equation that it determines Physical values scaled values y ax b P2 Y 1 1 1 1 s 1 1 1 1 Measured values Pid P1 X P2 X Measurement range Horizontal Axis Time Axis Time Axis Setting Normally under the initial settings the time axis scale is set as a length of time per grid division 1 div The selectable range is 100 ns div to 3 days div As you adjust the value the unit changes between seconds minutes hours and days automatically Because the horizontal display range is 10 div the amount of time on the waveform that is displayed is equal to the time axis setting x 10 When the 720210 HS100M12 module is installed the scale range starts at 100 ns div when it is not installed the scale range starts at 1 us div Internal and External Clocks Time base selection Under the initial settings the DL850 DL850V samples the measured signal using the internal clock signal produced by its internal time base circuit You can also use an external clock signal to control sampling Apply the external clock signal to the external clock input terminal This external clock input is useful for synchronizing to
272. tical cursors X Y waveforms horizontal axis ice ade eet o dern eate rre Haein horizontal cursors T Y waveforms 9 1 horizontal cursors X Y waveforms sssssssss 9 7 horizontal scale re cto emere eren 12 3 hysteresis cn dea race ead o c ond 2 34 l Page input COUPLING y neis an aR R PUER 2 6 input coupling 16 CH module c cceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 16 Instant start ime cree eter dee nre d EEan 4 1 integration a intensity x 2 22 ia e aai ove cen tt internal Clock 1 iret rrr rete trennen inn 3 1 interpolation method T Y waveforms 6 4 interpolation method X Y window sseessssss 7 2 inverted waveform display 2 12 IRIG fis ERN 20 6 J Page judgment conditions eese 13 2 13 4 K Page key lock iiit aci E eee ded 20 9 20 10 L Page VAD OLS 2 2 language ehe aset ge Me 20 6 ECD adjusting ire ce RE teo de dus 20 6 level inidiCator irr rre rir tr oreet 6 4 linear scaling 2 13 listen only CAN 2 38 logic display Tormiat er eget 20 8 logic measurement 2 36 logic pattern search ssssssssseseeeen 15 4 M Page MAG KhioD coiere eet ee ce e e Epoca 8 2 ENDE AE 19 5 main window display ratio of 8 2 manual event Fr Manual trigger 1 2 nxor ee ge ached veces 4 2 marker cursors FFT waveforms sssssss 9 9 marke
273. tically measured items are selected the DL850 DL850V displays the first three items ordered by ascending channel number and the order that the items appear in the Item Setup automated measurement item selection menu P P Amp Max Min Init1XY and Init2XY Example 1 When CH1 P P Amp CH2 Min CH3 Max Min are selected the following items are displayed CH1 P P CH2 Min CH3 Max Example 2 When CH1 Max Min CH2 P P Amp are selected the following items are displayed CH1 Max Min CH2 P P You can view the statistics of other items in the following way Load the items into a PC using the communication feature Save the statistical items as automated measurement values of waveform parameters and load the data into a PC Scroll through the list of calculated statistics using the arrow keys Measurement Time Period Time Range1 Time Range2 This setting is the same as the measurement time period setting for the automated measurement of waveform parameters P See here IM DL850 01EN 10 7 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 1 Cycle Mode 1 Cycle Mode This setting is the same as the 1 cycle mode setting for the automated measurement of waveform parameters P See here Cyclic Statistical Processing Cycle Statistics The DL850 DL850V determines periods in order from the oldest data of the displayed waveform measures the selected automatically measured items within each period and perf
274. time signal The Hilbert transform procedure is as follows When a time domain signal is transformed the signal is first transformed into the frequency domain through Fourier transform Next the phase of each frequency component is shifted by 90 degrees if the frequency is positive and 90 degrees if the frequency is negative Lastly taking the inverse Fourier transform completes the Hilbert transform Example The Hilbert transform can be used to analyze an envelope waveform AM amplitude modulation SQRT C1 x C1 HLBT C1 x HLBT C1 Demodulation of an FM Signal DIF PH C1 HLBT C1 Phase Function PH Phase function PH X1 Y1 computes tan X1 Y1 The phase function takes the phase of the previous point into consideration and continues to sum even when the value exceeds T the ATAN function reflects at 17 The unit is radians Previous point A02 A02 Previous point 62 01 A02 02 01 A02 App 4 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Differentiation and Integration DIF DDIF INTG and IINTG Differentiation DIF DDIF The computation of the first order and second order differentiated values uses the 5th order Lagrange interpolation formula to derive a point of data from the five points of data before and after the target The figure below shows data fO to fn with respect to sampling times x0 to xn The derivative and integrated values corresponding to these data points are computed as show
275. ting and stopping of statistical processing may require additional time depending on settings such as the record length the number of statistical processing items and the input waveform While the dual capture window is displayed you can perform statistical processing on captured waveforms To perform statistical processing on the waveforms in the main window turn the display of the dual capture window off The automated measurement results of captured waveforms are displayed in italics Notes about Using the 16 CH Voltage Input Module P See here IM DL850 01EN 10 11 11 Computation You can perform various computations on up to 1 Mpoint of data When more than 1 Mpoint of waveform data is displayed computation is performed on the first 1 Mpoint of data from the computation start point The results of computation are displayed in Math1 to Math8 Waveforms stored through hard disk recording cannot be computed Turning Computation On and Off Mode Select whether to use computation ON Computation is used OFF Computation is not used Computation Waveform Selection Select Math Trace Select a computed waveform to use to display the computation results Math1 to Math8 Computation Settings Math Setup Operator Operation Select an operator type of computation from the options below OFF Computation is not performed S1 S2 Adds the waveforms assigned to Source1 and Source2 S1 S2 Subtracts the waveform
276. to Math8 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module If the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it wW N Position Position Set the position of the selected marker Taking the center of the waveform display window to be 0 div you can move the markers within the range of 5 to 5 div in steps of the following size Time div x 10 display record length Marker Shape Marker Form Set the shape of the displayed marker to one of the options below Mark A dot e Line A crosshair Measurement Items Item Setup Marker cursors move on the waveform data You can measure the following values at the markers x1 Time value at Marker1 X2 Time value at Marker2 X3 Time value at Marker3 X4 Time value at Marker4 A X2 X1 Difference between the time values of Marker1 and Marker2 A X3 X1 Difference between the time values of Marker1 and Marker3 A X4 X1 Difference between the time values of Marker1 and Marker4 A X3 X2 Difference between the time values of Marker2 and Marker3 A X4 X2 Difference between the time values of Marker2 and Marker4 A X4 X3 Difference between the time values of Marker3 and Marker4 Y1 Vertical value at Marker1 Y2 Vertical valu
277. to being met Exit The result must change from being met to not being met Delay Time Set the amount of time that must pass after state condition A is met Selectable range 0 0 us to 10000000 0 us 10 s The default settings is 0 0 us Resolution 0 1 us Trigger Level Level and Trigger Hysteresis Hys Set these items for each trigger source These items are the same as the trigger level J See here and hysteresis f See here of the simple trigger Trigger Hold Off Hold Off Trigger Position Position Trigger Delay Delay These items are the same as trigger hold off See here trigger position gt See here and trigger delay P See here of the simple trigger IM DL850 01EN 4 9 4 Triggering Edge On A Trigger Enhanced While state condition A is met the DL850 DL850V triggers on the OR of multiple trigger source edges Condition A is being met Trigger t Edge detection Trigger Source You can use CH1 to CH16 and Bit 1 to Bit 8 as the trigger sources Bit 1 to Bit 8 appear as options when a logic input module is installed in a slot gt See here State Condition A State To set state condition A select the states of the trigger sources in relation to the trigger level Example State Condition A CH1 H H The signal level must be high CH2 L L The signal level must be low CH3 X The signal is not used as a condition Bit 1 L Bit 2 H Bit 8
278. torage media that are compatible with USB Mass Storage Class Ver 1 1 The DL850 DL850V can handle up to four storage media If the connected medium is partitioned the DL850 DL850V treats each partition as a separate storage medium As such the DL850 DL850V can handle up to four partitions IM DL850 01EN 18 1 18 Saving and Loading Data Saving Data Save The DL850 DL850V saves data to the specified storage medium Li Press SHIFT and then SAVE to display the SAVE menu On this menu you can configure the waveform data and screen capture data save operations Press SAVE without SHIFT to execute the save operation On the menu for configuring the save operation the SAVE menu you cannot turn off both the waveform data and screen capture data save operations Saving Waveform Data Waveform You can save the waveform data that the DL850 DL850V has measured to a file in binary ASCII or floating point format Save Destination File List Specify the file to save to File Name File Name Set the file name You can use the auto naming feature to automatically assign file names Whether Auto Naming is set to Numbering Date or OFF when the size of a single file exceeds 2 GB an underscore and a three digit serial number 000 to 999 are appended to the file names File Name Example for When Auto Naming Is Set to Date 20100630 121530 100 000 2010 06 30 12 15 30 100 Year The serial number from 0
279. trol circuit coupling arrangement that is used when the coupling is set to AC DC RMS Input terminal Vertical RMS control conversion lt An 1 MQ circuit circuit AC RMS Input terminal Vertical RMS oi control conversion lt an 1 MQ circuit circuit IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis ACCEL Only when measuring acceleration To measure acceleration with the 701275 ACCL VOLT set the input coupling to ACCEL OFF only for the 16 CH Voltage Input Module Set the coupling to OFF to not include the sub channels selected on the 720220 16CH VOLT in the measurement Probe Attenuation and Current to Voltage Conversion Ratio Probe In voltage current measurement a probe is used to connect the circuit under measurement to a signal input terminal Using a probe has the following advantages Prevents the disturbance of the voltage and current of the circuit being measured Allows signals to be applied with no distortion Expands the voltage current range that the DL850 DL850V can measure When you use a probe to read the measurement voltage current correctly you must set the attenuation on the DL850 DL850V to match the probe attenuation or current to voltage conversion ratio Set the attenuation ratio as indicated below for each probe The probes are optional accessories that are sold separately Probe Type Attenuation Isolated probe 700929 10 1
280. tside of this range the internal protection circuit will cut off the pull up circuit Internal Equivalent Circuit for When the Pull up Function Is Enabled 5V 10 kQ Zoom Method V Scale Zooming by Setting a Magnification V Zoom Zooming by Setting Upper and Lower Display Limits Upper Lower P See here Offset Offset P See here Trace Settings Trace Setup P See here Linear Scaling Linear Scale P See here IM DL850 01EN 2 35 2 Vertical Axis Logic Measurement For logic measurement the items that have to be set for each input signal CH1 to CH16 include vertical scales the logic bit settings the logic bit mapping the zoom method and trace settings You can measure logic signals by connecting a logic probe to the 720230 LOGIC logic module For information about how to connect logic probes see section 3 10 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 O3EN Waveform Display Display Select whether to display each channel s input signal waveform ON Displays the waveform OFF Does not display the waveform Labels Label P See here Waveform Vertical Position Vertical POSITION knob P See here Logic Bit Settings Logic Bit Setup Bit Display Display You can set whether to display the waveform of each bit Bit1 to Bit8 All Bits On All Bits Off Bit Name Bit Name You can assign labels to bits using up to eight characters Chattering Elimi
281. u can select and display the numbers even during waveform acquisition Current 1 2 Current the most recent waveform 1 the oldest waveform 2 the second oldest waveform Displaying a List of Captured Waveforms List When waveform acquisition is stopped you can display a list of captured waveform numbers and trigger times You can select a waveform that you want to display from the list and display it 5 8 IM DL850 01EN 5 Waveform Acquisition Zooming Captured Waveforms Mag Position Zooms the displayed captured waveforms Zoom Factor Mag You can set the zoom factor to a value between the time axis setting at the time when the captured waveform was acquired to the minimum captured waveform time axis setting of 1 us div Position Position The captured waveform is zoomed around the position that you set here Turning the Display of the Capture Window On and Off Window ON and OFF You can set whether to display the dual capture window When the dual capture window is displayed cursor measurement automated measurement of waveform parameters and statistical processing are performed on the captured waveforms When the dual capture window is not displayed measurement and processing are performed on the main waveforms ON The dual capture window is displayed OFF The dual capture window is not displayed Display Ratio of the Main Window Main Ratio P See here Window Layout Window Layout Set the
282. ub channel turn its input coupling off Sub channels whose input coupling has been turned off are not scanned The maximum sample rate of the 16 CH Voltage Input Module is 200 kS s when only one sub channel is measured The maximum sample rate per sub channel varies depending on the main channel sample rate and the number of measured sub channels For information about sample rates see appendix 1 in the Getting Started Guide IM DL850 03EN The sample rate that is displayed on the screen is the sample rate of the main channel The record length of each sub channel varies depending on the set record length and the number of measured sub channels Record length of each sub channel lt set record length number of measured sub channels The timing of waveform acquisition is different for each sub channel but all the sub channels are stored in the acquisition memory as if they had been sampled at the same timing This means that the sampling times of the acquired waveform data are different from the sampling times of the actual applied waveforms Because the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory is used to display waveforms on the screen the data of all sub channels is displayed as if though it were sampled at the same timing IM DL850 01EN 1 Main Features The following operations are performed on the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory waveform zooming cursor measurement the automated measurement of waveform parameters
283. ured waveform data file is automatically saved to the same name as the main waveform data file with DC added to the end of the file name If you configure the record length and the number of channels so that the size of a file would exceed 2 GB the file cannot be created Floating Point Float The sampled data stored in the acquisition memory is converted using the specified range and saved to a file in 32 bit IEEE floating format The extension is FLD You can use the file to analyze waveforms on your PC The data notation is little endian Intel format You cannot load the file into the DL850 DL850V Waveforms measured using the dual capture feature are saved simultaneously to separate main waveform data and captured waveform data files The captured waveform data file is automatically saved to the same name as the main waveform data file with DC added to the end of the file name If you configure the record length and the number of channels so that the size of a file would exceed 2 GB the file cannot be created IM DL850 01EN 18 3 18 Saving and Loading Data Data Size The data sizes indicated below are for when the record length is 100 kpoint and you save the measured data from CH1 to CH4 with all computed waveforms turned off and one history waveform Data Type Extension Size In bytes Binary WDF Approx 800 K 100 kpoint 32 x 4 channels x the number of history waveforms x 2 HDR Approx 2 K approx 3
284. ut Input ON The data is monitored OFF The data is not monitored or displayed Labels Label You can specify a name of up to 16 characters in length for each channel You can use the DISPLAY menu to set whether to display labels P See here Message Format Set the message format of the collected data frames STD Standard format XTD Extended format ID Set the message ID of the collected data frames Standard format 0 to 7FFH 11 bits Extended format 0 to 1FFFFFFFH 29 bits Byte Count Set the byte count Auto 1 to 8 IM DL850 01EN 2 39 2 Vertical Axis Start Bit Specify the bit number of the data extraction starting point 0 to 63 Bit Count Specify the number of data bits to extract 2 to 16 32 for firmware versions 1 2 and later However when the data type is set to Float the only bit length that can be set is 32 Byte Order Select the method endian to use to store the data in the acquisition memory Big Endian 63 56 55 87 0 yd i MSB Most significant byte Te 0 LSB Least significant byte msb eee deb msb Most significant bit Isb Least significant bit Little Endian 7 0 15 55 63 56 jut 0 MSB Most significant byte LSB Least significant byte msb Most significant bit Isb Least significant bit CAN Data Conversion Conditions Value Type Select the data type of the extracted CAN data Unsigned Unsigned integer Signed Signed integer Float Real number applies to
285. uto or On Start Auto Auto The DL850 DL850V continues waveform acquisition until you stop it using the START STOP key Instant start On Start After the amount of data that corresponds to the set record length or 10 div worth of data is acquired waveform acquisition stops Main waveform sample rate captured waveform sample rate The sample rates must be set so that the sample rate of the captured waveforms is faster than the sample rate of the main waveforms Trigger Condition When dual capturing is enabled the trigger conditions apply to the captured waveforms When the trigger conditions are met the DL850 DL850V triggers and acquires the captured waveforms Action Action Setup You can make the DL850 DL850V perform a specified action when it triggers and acquires captured waveforms P See here Captured Waveform Display Number Select Number You can select the number of a captured waveform and display it The trigger time of the selected waveform appears to the lower left of the waveform display area When Capture Mode Is Set to Auto The numbers that you can select vary as indicated below You can select and display the numbers when waveform acquisition is stopped Current 1 2 Current the most recent waveform 1 one waveform before the most recent waveform 2 two waveforms before the most recent waveform When Capture Mode Is Set to On Start The numbers that you can select vary as indicated below Yo
286. utomatically You can load the data that has been saved Models with the HDO option are equipped with eSATA connectors You need to purchase a hard disk that supports eSATA separately For information about supported hard disks contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer A single DL850 DL850V cannot be equipped with both the HDO and HD1 option The DL850 DL850V stops acquiring waveforms after it has acquired the amount of data that corresponds to the set record length The maximum record length is 30 days When you enable hard disk recording the trigger mode is automatically set to On Start Hard disk recording is possible for the numbers of channels sample rates set record lengths and time axis settings listed below Number of Channels Maximum Sample Rate Set Record Length Time Axis Setting 1 1 MS s 3 500 kS s 1 Mpoint or more 1 s div or more 8 200 kS s the roll mode display area 16 100 kS s External hard disk that supports eSATA Hard disk recording HDO option or I an internal hard disk 9 HD1 option Input signal Loading of waveform data Acquisition Normal measurement memory Saving and loading of waveform data Recorded Data File HD Recording Setup You can save data to a specific file name on a hard disk and add comments to it In hard disk recording a folder for the current date is created on the specified drive and the recorded data files are saved to that folder File
287. waveform parameters or FFT analysis on the history waveform that you specified with Selected Record You can also calculate statistics of automatically measured values on all history waveforms Displaying and Analyzing XY Waveforms You can display XY waveforms and perform analysis on the history waveform you specified with Selected Record If the display mode is set to All XY waveforms of all history waveforms are displayed Display Mode Display Mode Selects how history waveforms are displayed One waveform 1 Record Only the waveform that corresponds to the selected record number is displayed All waveforms All Record All history waveforms from the specified start Start Record to stop End Record number are overlaid All waveforms other than the highlighted one are displayed in an intermediate color Averaged waveform Average Record Linear averaging is performed on all history waveforms from the specified start Start Record to stop End Record number and the results are displayed as a single waveform O An averaged waveform cannot be displayed for the following history waveforms Waveforms with record lengths of 250 kpoint or greater on the standard model 1 Mpoint or greater on models with the M1 option or 2 5 Mpoint or greater on models with the M2 option Highlighting Selected Record The latest history waveform is assigned the record number zero and older waveforms are assigned numbers in descending order
288. waveforms sssssesesseneene eene nennen nnns 9 6 OQ REN 9 7 FET Waveforms arrine M 9 9 Notes about Cursor Measurement nennen eene nennen enne en nnne nnne 9 11 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Mode Settings MOde eerie ir einer Ree i beni e do te re ee oe see Sud Ede bd eren niue 10 1 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters ON sss 10 1 Measurement Items Measure Setup emen mener nnne 10 1 Setting the Delay Delay Setup eene nte neni tne nr trii dne etin 10 4 Measurement Time Period Time Range1 Time Range2 see em 10 5 1 Cycle Mode 1 Cycle Mode citet nertce tenente trend nera rede EIL eere vx deve dba inn 10 6 Notes about Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters eene 10 6 Normal Statistical Processing Statistics sse 10 7 Cyclic Statistical Processing Cycle Statistics ssee em 10 8 Statistical Processing of History Waveforms History Statistics sseesssss 10 10 Notes about Statistical Processing sssssse eene enne 10 11 Computation Turning Computation On and Off Mode ccccccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaeaeeeeseneneeeeeeeseeneeeees 11 1 Computation Waveform Selection Select Math Trace sseee em 11 1 Computation Settings Math Setup
289. waveforms Waveform Data for the Last N Triggers Is Stored 1 Current displayed waveform Select Record 0 t Selected Record 0 Past waveform Set Select Record to a value in the range of 0 to N 1 Selected Record 25 Search You can search for waveforms that meet the specified conditions display the detected history waveforms and list the timestamps of the waveforms Zone Search You can search for history waveforms that did or did not pass through a specified search zone Waveforms Stored in the Acquisition Memory rake i Specified area l Only waveforms that pass through the specified area are detected and displayed IM DL850 01EN 16 1 16 Displaying and Searching History Waveforms Parameter Search You can search for history waveforms that do or do not meet specified search parameter conditions Waveforms Stored in the Acquisition Memory Source P P Condition OUT End Record Start Record Uu Waveforms whose P P value exceeds the specified range are detected Time Range1 Seloctad Record 28 Time Range2 History Waveform Search Range The search range is from Start Record to End Record Search Method The DL850 DL850V starts searching in order from the newest waveform Calculation Cursor Measurement Automated Measurement Statistical Processing and FFT You can perform calculations cursor measurement automated measurement of
290. ween channels is displayed as an angle Polarity Select the slope of the edge you want to detect 4 Rising 4 Falling Edge Count Sets which edge counted from the start point T Range1 of the measurement time period to use as a detected point measured point Selectable range 1 to 9 Reference Select whether to use a trace or trigger as the reference for the reference waveform Trace A trace is used Trigger A trigger is used Reference Waveform Reference Trace When Reference is set to Trace set the reference waveform e Trace Select a reference waveform CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math8 1 You can select the channel of an installed module You cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 Ifthe 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it Polarity Select the slope of the edge you want to detect f rising 1 falling Edge Count Sets which edge counted from the start point T Range1 of the measurement time period to use as a detected point reference point Selectable range 1 to 9 10 4 IM DL850 01EN 10 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Li The voltage level of the detected point is the mesial line The measurement item name that appea
291. were displayed before you execute auto setup will be cleared Signals That Auto Setup Can Be Applied To You can use auto setup for the following types of input signals When module 720210 is installed Simple repeating signals with frequencies between 50 Hz and 10 MHz When module 720210 is not installed Simple repeating signals with frequencies between 50 Hz and 1 MHz Signals whose maximum absolute input voltage is 20 mV at 1 1 probe attenuation to the maximum range x 10 O The auto setup feature may not work properly for signals that include a DC component or high frequency components Undoing Auto Setup Undo You can revert to the settings that were used immediately before you executed auto setup Initializing Settings Initialize You can reset the DL850 DL850V settings to their factory default values This feature is useful when you want to cancel all the settings that you have entered or when you want to redo measurement from scratch Default reset refers to the act of resetting the DL850 DL850V settings to their factory default values Items That Cannot Be Reset The following settings cannot be reset Date and time settings communication settings the language setting Japanese or English and environment settings Undoing Default Reset Undo If you perform default reset by mistake you can undo it by pressing the Undo soft key To Reset All Settings to Their Default Values While holding down the RESET key turn the p
292. xceeds 64000 the maximum and minimum values may be outside of range of the displayed list When this happens f maximum value and minimum value will not appear Sort Sorts the list in the specified order Forward from the oldest or Reverse from the latest Statistics Max Moves to the maximum value T for the selected measurement item Statistics Min Moves to the minimum value J for the selected measurement item O In cyclic statistical processing you can select a waveform number one period with the jog shuttle and press the SET key to zoom in on it Statistical processing is only performed on the number of data points that can be displayed in the list Statistical Processing of History Waveforms History Statistics In the statistical processing of history waveforms the DL850 DL850V measures automatically measured items on the acquired waveform using the history feature and performs statistical processing on them Statistical processing is performed on older waveform data first The waveforms that statistical processing is performed on are those waveforms shown in the List that can be accessed from the HISTORY menu Statistical processing of history waveforms can be used with 1 cycle mode and the delay feature Measurement Items Measure Setup These items are the same as those for the normal statistical processing of automated measurement parameters P See here Measurement Time Period Time Range1 Time Range2
293. xis settings of one sub channel to another sub channel There are some items that cannot be configured from the All Sub Channels Setup list P See here Sub Channels 1 to 16 Sub Channel 1 to 16 The sub channel menu that corresponds to the key you pressed appears You can set the various vertical axis settings for each sub channel Labels Label P See here Vertical Scale SCALE knob P See here Waveform Vertical Position Vertical POSITION knob P See here Input Coupling Coupling You can set the input coupling to DC GND or OFF Sub channels whose coupling is set to OFF are not measured or displayed P See here Bandwidth Bandwidth You can set the bandwidth limit to 500 Hz or Full P See here 2 16 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Zoom Method V Scale Zooming by Setting a Magnification V Zoom Zooming by Setting Upper and Lower Display Limits Upper Lower P See here Offset Offset P See here Trace Settings Trace Setup P See here Inverted Waveform Display Invert Linear Scaling Linear Scale P See here IM DL850 01EN 2 17 2 Vertical Axis Setting All Sub Channels All SubChannels Setup Input Settings Setup You can configure the settings of all sub channels while viewing the settings in a list The settings that you can view and configure are listed below Display color label Label coupling Coupling vertical scale V Scale bandwidth limit Band Width zoom met
294. xo llo 0 Pointx ll lo h h sA A A Point x2 ll 2 lo I1 h 2 l1 l2 h Ih 2 li 12 h Point xn Iln llo lei In h Binary Conversion BIN Binary conversion is performed through the use of the specified threshold levels BIN C1 Upper threshold level Lower threshold level App 6 IM DL850 01EN Appendix Pulse Width Computation The signal is converted to binary values according to the preset threshold levels and the time of the pulse width is plotted as the Y axis value for that interval You can set the interval to one of the four settings below PWHH From a rising edge to the next rising edge PWHL From a rising edge to the next falling edge PWLH From a falling edge to the next rising edge PWLL From a falling edge to the next falling edge PWXX From a rising or falling edge to the next rising or falling edge FV Inverse of PWHH Example for PWHH Upper threshold Waveform to eEBBGERV ppb level be computed IER rs DOCE e Lower i i f i threshold i i i i level t1 0 0 c5 t3 I i l i Computed i result t1 t2 t3 FFT Function user defined Each frequency component G of a linear spectrum is represented by G R jl where R is the real part and is the imaginary part Linear Spectrum The linear spectrum can be directly determined with the FFT Through this spectrum the magnitude and phase of each frequency component included in the mea
295. xt Start P See here Action Action P See here Determination Period Time Range1 and Time Range2 P See here GO NO GO Determination Results The results of GO NO GO determination number of determinations number of failures appear at the bottom of the screen Exe Count 10 Fail Count 4 Result XXXXOOOO Determination Failure count Indication of whether reference count conditions 1 to 16 are met Measured values for XXXXOOOO each parameter 1 2 3 16 Reference conditions O Condition met X Condition not met No condition specified In this example reference conditions 1 and 4 are not met while reference conditions 5 to 8 are met 13 4 IM DL850 01EN 13 GO NO GO Determination Notes about GO NO GO Determination During determination all keys other than START STOP are invalid The determination interval is synchronized to the trigger However while actions are being performed after determination the DL850 DL850V will not trigger While you are accessing the DL850 DL850V through the FTP or Web server if one of the following operations is performed actions cannot be executed until you finish accessing the DL850 DL850V Printing and saving of screen capture data and saving of waveform data When the GO NO GO mode is not set to OFF computation and FFT analysis cannot be performed Also when computation or FFT analysis is enabled the GO NO GO mode cannot
296. y Full Screen Waveform Display The menu disappears and the waveform display area expands horizontally Channel Information The following items are displayed However as the number of displayed channels increases some items may be omitted Voltage measurement V div input coupling probe attenuation type bandwidth limit Temperature measurement Temperature div thermocouple type bandwidth limit Strain measurement uSTR div or mV V div measurement range bandwidth limit Acceleration measurement Acceleration div gain input coupling bias Frequency measurement Value div measurement mode preset Numeric Monitor The level indicator values for each channel appear in the numeric monitor display The numeric monitor display is updated at approximately every 0 5 s Size of the Channel Information and Numeric Monitor Display Area Ch Information You can set the size of the display area that appears when you switch from the menu to the channel information or numeric monitor display Full Full screen Narrow Width of the menu displayed in the location of the menu Wide Displayed on the right half of the screen 6 6 IM DL850 01EN 7 Displaying X Y Waveforms You can view the correlation between two waveform levels by assigning the level of one waveform to the X axis horizontal axis and the level of the other waveform to the Y axis vertical axis There are two X Y waveform windows and you can displa
297. y file name data size date etc Display Format Select whether to display a list of files or to display thumbnails Selecting the Type of File to List File Filter You can limit the type of files that appear in the list by selecting an extension Changing the Storage Medium Change Drive You can select the storage medium that you want to access The DL850 DL850V displays various storage media as follows SD 1 The SD memory card inserted into the SD memory card slot of the DL850 DL850V USB 0 AUSB storage device that is connected to a DL850 DL850V USB port the first connected device USB 1 AUSB storage device that is connected to a DL850 DL850V USB port the second connected device HD 0 On models with the HDO option an external hard disk that supports eSATA connected to the EXT HDD connector On models with the HD1 option the internal hard disk Network A storage device on the network Making Folders Make Dir Make a folder You can use the same characters in folder names that you can in file names P See here Copying and Moving Files Copy and Move You can copy or move the selected files and folders to other storage media or folders You can copy or move multiple files at the same time Deleting Files and Folders Delete You can delete the selected files and folders Renaming Files and Folders Rename You can rename a selected file or folder Turning File Protection On and Off Protect ON and OFF You
298. y four pairs of waveforms in each window for a total of eight pairs You can perform cursor measurements on the displayed X Y waveforms You can also observe T Y time axis waveforms and X Y waveforms simultaneously Turning the X Y Window Display On and Off Display You can select whether to display each X Y window ON Displays the X Y window OFF Does not display the X Y window Eight Pairs of X Y Waveforms Setup You can display XY1 to XY4 in window 1 and XY5 to XY8 in window 2 You can configure the display settings of a total of 8 X Y waveforms You can configure the following settings for each X Y waveform Display DISPLAY You can select whether to display each X Y waveform ON Displays the X Y waveform OFF Does not display the X Y waveform X Trace and Y Trace X Trace and Y Trace For XY1 to XY4 and XY5 to XY8 you can select which waveforms to assign to the X and Y axes from the following options CH1 to CH16 16chVOLT CAN Math1 to Math8 1 You can select the channel of an installed module However you cannot select the channel of a logic module 2 Ifthe 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed After you select 16chVOLT select a sub channel 3 On the DL850V when a CAN bus monitor module is installed After you select CAN select a sub channel If the data type Value Type is set to Logic you will not be able to select it Li An X Y waveform cannot be displayed if the waveforms assigned to its X and
299. y the level range settings for each analog signal trigger source P See here Trigger Hysteresis Hys Set this item for each trigger source This item is the same as the hysteresis J See here of the simple trigger Trigger Hold Off Hold Off Trigger Position Position Trigger Delay Delay These items are the same as trigger hold off J See here trigger position gt See here and trigger delay P See here of the simple trigger 4 12 IM DL850 01EN 4 Triggering Period Trigger Enhanced The DL850 DL850V triggers on a specified period of occurrence of state condition B The DL850 DL850V triggers when state condition B occurs again Met Met B Reference time T gt B H Trigger Trigger Source You can use CH1 to CH16 and Bit 1 to Bit 8 as the trigger sources Bit 1 to Bit 8 appear as options when a logic input module is installed in a slot gt See here State Condition B State To set state condition B select the states of the trigger sources in relation to the trigger level Example State Condition B CH1 H H The signal level must be high CH2 L L The signal level must be low CH3 X The signal is not used as a condition Determination Mode Mode Set what kind of relationship must be established between period T and the specified reference times Time or T1 and T2 for the DL850 DL850V to trigger T lt Time Period T must
300. ysis Zooming along the Time Axis GIGAZoom You can magnify displayed waveforms along the time axis The zoomed waveforms of two locations can be displayed simultaneously the dual zoom feature This feature is useful when you set a long acquisition time and want to observe a portion of the waveform closely Displaying X Y Waveforms You can observe the correlation between two waveform signal levels by displaying one signal level on the X axis horizontal axis and a second signal level on the Y axis vertical axis You can display X Y waveforms at the same time as normal T Y time and signal level waveforms You can display up to four overlapping X Y waveforms in both Window1 and Window2 Because multiple X Y waveforms can be displayed it is easy to compare the relationships between phases You can use this feature to evaluate DC motors using Lissajous waveforms Snapshot You can continue displaying a waveform on the screen as a snapshot waveform after the screen has been updated and the waveform has been cleared in update mode or after the waveform has left the screen in roll mode Snapshot waveforms appear in white You can compare them with new waveforms You can also save and print snapshot waveforms as screen captures Waveform Computation and Analysis Waveform Computation You can perform basic arithmetic binarization FFT power spectrum and phase shifting display the waveform with its phase shifted On models with the G2 opt
301. z 50 S s 20Hz 40 Hz 5 S s to 20 S s 20Hz 40 Hz 2 S s or less 20 Hz 40 Hz Ext sample 40 kHz OFF For example when the sample rate is between 100 kS s and 50 kS s the cutoff frequency of the anti aliasing filter is 4096 of the sample rate 2 8 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Zoom Method V Scale You can choose the method for zooming the waveform vertically DIV The waveform is zoomed by a set magnification SPAN The waveform is zoomed to fit within specified upper and lower display limits Zooming by Setting a Magnification V Zoom When V Scale is set to DIV you can set the vertical magnification and enlarge or reduce the waveform along the vertical axis This method is useful when you want to change the vertical scale of the waveform after it has been displayed Zoom Factor V Zoom The magnifications that you can choose from are listed below X0 1 x0 111 x0 125 x0 143 x0 167 x0 2 x0 25 x0 33 x0 4 x0 5 x0 556 x0 625 x0 667 x0 714 x0 8 x0 833 X1 x1 11 x1 25 x1 33 x1 43 x1 67 x2 x2 22 x2 5 x3 33 x4 x5 x6 67 x8 x10 x12 5 x16 7 x20 x25 x40 x50 x100 The range of zoom magnifications that you can choose varies under special circumstances as described below When using the 701260 HV with RMS 50 V div x0 25 to x100 100 V div x0 5 to x100 200 Vidiv x1 to x100 When measuring acceleration using the 701275 ACCL VOLT x0 5 to x50 When using the 701280 FREQ x0 33 to x1
302. zation Jump Width Sync Jump Width Set the correction value used to synchronize the bit timing between sending and receiving nodes 1 to 4 in units of Tq Time Quantum Number of Samples Bit Sample Num You can set the number of samples at each bit s sample point 1 The sample point data is sampled once We recommend that you use this setting for high speed busses 3 The sample point data is sampled three times We recommend that you use this setting for slow and medium speed busses Listen Only Listen Only ON The ACK bit is not transmitted OFF The ACK bit is transmitted 2 38 IM DL850 01EN 2 Vertical Axis Terminator Terminator ON The 120 Q terminator between CAN H and CAN L on the CAN bus line is turned on OFF The terminator between CAN H and CAN L on the CAN bus line is turned off CAN I F CAN TRANSCEIVER CAN Data Extraction Conditions You can use the extraction conditions to specify which portion of the CAN data in the data field to assign to each sub channel For each port you can configure up to 16 sub channels up to 60 sub channels on modules whose firmware version is 1 2 or later When the data field contains two units of data bit 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 0 CH15 2 CH15 1 Start Bit 0 Bit Count 16bit 2 byte integer CH15_ 1 Start Bit 32 Bit Count 32bit 4 byte integer CH15 2 4 byte real numbers can be extracted by modules whose firmware version is 1 2 or later Inp

DL850 ScopeCorder Features Guide - Electro

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents